they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

Tìm kiếm với hình ảnh

Vui lòng chỉ chọn một câu hỏi

icon_user

Hoidap247.com Nhanh chóng, chính xác

Hãy đăng nhập hoặc tạo tài khoản miễn phí!

add

Danh mục mới

avatar

  • Chưa có nhóm
  • uyenminhnguyentran - 17:44:17 11/09/2020

1. they often (visit)......... their parents in the holiday 2. we (speak)..........french at the moment 3. i (watch)......... tv about hours a day 4. my family usually (go)........ to the movies on sunday 5. look at the girl ! she ( ride )............. a horse 6. we (play).......... tennis now 7. minh sometimes (practise)......... the guitar in his room 8............. you (like)......... chocolate ice cream ? 9. i really (like) ............ cooking 10. hung can't answer the phone because he (take)........ a shower

  • Hỏi chi tiết

report

Hãy luôn nhớ cảm ơn và vote 5* nếu câu trả lời hữu ích nhé!

avatar

1.visit               (thì hiện tại)

2.Are speaking     (thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)

3.watch          (thì hiện tại)  

4.go            (thì hiện tại)

5.is riding          (thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)

6.are playing        (thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)

7.practices                ( thì hiện tại )

8.do/like                   (thì hiện tại )

9.like                     (thì hiện tại )

10.is taking              (thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)

xin hay nhất 

Hãy giúp mọi người biết câu trả lời này thế nào?

hert

cảm ơn bạn nhiều

cho mình hay nhất nha bạn

avatar

Mình đang cần bài này luôn á

avatar

  • phuonghanhnguyen

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

They  often (visit) visit   their parents in the holiday.

We (speak) are speak french at the moment.

I (watch) watch   T.V about hours a day.

My family usually (go) goes to the movies on sunday.`

Look at the girl ! She ( ride) is rides a horse.

We (play) are playing tennis now.

Minh sometimes (practise) practise the guitar in his room.

Do you (like) like chocolate ice cream?

I really (like) like  cooking.

Hung can't answer the phone because he (take) is taking a shower.

*`xin` ` hay` `nhất`

avatar

Bạn muốn hỏi điều gì?

question

Tham Gia Group Dành Cho 2K13 Chia Sẻ, Trao Đổi Tài Liệu Miễn Phí

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

Lý do báo cáo vi phạm?

Gửi yêu cầu Hủy

logo

Cơ quan chủ quản: Công ty Cổ phần Công nghệ Giáo dục Thành Phát

social

Tải ứng dụng

google play

  • Hướng dẫn sử dụng
  • Điều khoản sử dụng
  • Nội quy hoidap247

mail

  • Tìm kiếm thành viên Tìm kiếm thành viên và những người bạn đang theo dõi
  • Tìm kiếm câu trả lời Tìm kiếm câu trả lời cho câu hỏi của bạn
  • Giáo dục công dân
  • Tiếng anh thí điểm
  • Tự nhiên và xã hội
  • Lịch sử và Địa lý
  • Khoa học tự nhiên
  • Hoạt động trải nghiệm, hướng nghiệp
  • Hoạt động trải nghiệm sáng tạo

Chủ đề / Chương

Review 4 (Units 10- 11- 12)

  • trắc nghiệm
  • bài tập sgk

Minah - Girl

  • Minah - Girl's day

They often (visit) ____________ their parents in the holidays

Khách

They often (visit) ___visit__ _______ their parents in the holidays

*•.¸♡  𝓐𝓷𝓱𝓱 𝓣𝓱𝓾̛𝓾̛ ♡¸.•*

  • *•.¸♡ 𝓐𝓷𝓱𝓱 𝓣𝓱𝓾̛𝓾̛ ♡¸.•*

I. 1._________ you ever (see)________ a real robot at work? - No, never 2.If the weather (be)_______fine, we (plant)_______ some young trees in our garden. 3.I (read)_______that novel three times. 4. Maryam (stay)___________ with us at the moment. II.read the passage and answer te questions. In the summer holidays, Mr. Hung, Mrs. Lan and their children often go to Vung Tau for two or three days. They usually stay in a small house or a flat by the sea, but sometimes they stay in a hotel. Last summer they went to Nha Trang. They stayed at the Sunshine Hotel for three days. In the morning, Ba played soccer with his father on the beach. Lan and her mother walked long the beach and built sand castles. They visited Tri Nguyen Aquarium. They also bought a lot of souvenirs for their friends.

1.Where does Lan's family often go for their summer vacation? ___________________________ 2. How long do they often stay there? ____________________________ 3. Where did they go last summer ? ____________________________ 4.What did Lan and her mother do in the morning? ______________________________ 5. Did they visit Tri Nguyen Aquarium ? _____________________________

III .Put the verbs in the brackets in the corect form. 1._____________ you ever(see)________ a real robot at work ?-no, never 2.If the weather(be)___________fine , we (plant)_____________some young trees in our garden. 3.I(read)______________that novel three times. 4.Maryam (stay)____________with us at the moment. . giúp mk vs ai nhah mk tich

Nguyễn văn a

  • Nguyễn văn a

give the right form of the verbs in brackets

1 . She never ( eat ) a pizza before .

2 . you ever ( visit ) London ?

Yes , I go there 2 years ago.

3 . You had better ( brush ) your teeth after every meat .

4 . why you ( not go ) to the party last night ?

5 . I'm going to the post offive ( buy ) some stamps .

6 . Don't worry . I ( go ) swimming with you tomorrow

7 . My parents like ( live ) in the countryside . I think they (move) to our hometown next year .

8 . My friends hate eating out . They think it ( cost ) a lot of money .

Nguyễn Minh Phương

  • Nguyễn Minh Phương

she calls you if she has much time

Bob likes comedy because it make him laugh

tìm lỗi sai trong các câu trên

bài 2:put the words in the correct order

1:the house/ you shouldn't/ go out of/the light on/when you/ leave

2.Pat/doing/and/now/sister /are/his/ homework/their

3.problems/causes /pollution/breathing/air

4.go/do/weekend /on/always/fishing/parents/their/?

5.could/robots/lift heavy things/some years ago

My parents often help me _____________ my homework

Park Chan

I. Read the text and choose the word that best fits each of the blank spaces. There is one word you don't need to use

1. Play - 2. Popular - 3. Competitions - 4. Players - 5. Can - 6. Need

Today, badminton becomes a very (1) ......................., sports activity. It spreads quickly from the city to the countryside. People need only a pair of rackets, a shuttlecock, a net and small piece of land to (2)..................the game. Two or four (3).................hit the shuttlecock over the net with their rackets. People (4)..................... play badminton in their free time or in a competition. Now there are many badminton(5).................and even a Word Cup. One of the stongest countries in badminton in Indonesia

Hà Hương Hằng

  • Hà Hương Hằng

complete the sentences with the correct form of words in the brackets

1. the police are trying to.....the dead body. (identity)

2. they want to.....these road. (wide)

3. the apples......in June. (ripe)

4. he spoke with great ....... Everyone understood. (clear)

5. it was one of his most important...... (achieve)

Look! They ____________ badminton with their friends

Luxi 208

1.The fist olympic games (take) .......place in Greece in 776

2.People (start)........tp use computer about 50 years ago

3.What.......you (do)......last weekend?

-I (cycle)......round the lake with my friends.Then I (watch).......TV in the afternoon

4.The children (be).......here five minutes ago. Now,they (play).....in the back yard

5..............you (be).........to Ha Noi capital yet?

6.This is the most beautiful picture he (ever take) ..........

7.Minh (not go)........school yesterday

Vui Nguyen

Rearrange the words and phrases to make meaningful sentences. 1. when / turn off / don't / you / them / the lights / use =>................................................................. 2. students / greener place / if / the school yard / will / plant / in / a / more trees / their school / be =>................................................................. 3. the air / will have / if / we / have / breathing problems / cleaner / is / less =>................................................................. 4. children / able to / robots / help / do / teaching / will / their homework / be =>................................................................. Các bạn giúp mình nha ! Mình đang cần gấp...

Khoá học trên OLM (olm.vn)

  • Toán lớp 6 (Kết nối tri thức với cuộc sống)
  • Toán lớp 6 (Cánh Diều)
  • Toán lớp 6 (Chân trời sáng tạo)
  • Ngữ văn lớp 6 (Kết nối tri thức với cuộc sống)
  • Ngữ văn lớp 6 (Cánh Diều)
  • Ngữ văn lớp 6 (Chân trời sáng tạo)
  • Tiếng Anh lớp 6 (i-Learn Smart World)
  • Tiếng Anh lớp 6 (Global Success)
  • Khoa học tự nhiên lớp 6 (Kết nối tri thức với cuộc sống)
  • Khoa học tự nhiên lớp 6 (Cánh diều)
  • Khoa học tự nhiên lớp 6 (Chân trời sáng tạo)
  • Lịch sử và địa lý lớp 6 (Kết nối tri thức với cuộc sống)
  • Lịch sử và địa lý lớp 6 (Cánh diều)
  • Lịch sử và địa lý lớp 6 (Chân trời sáng tạo)
  • Giáo dục công dân lớp 6 (Kết nối tri thức với cuộc sống)
  • Giáo dục công dân lớp 6 (Cánh diều)
  • Giáo dục công dân lớp 6 (Chân trời sáng tạo)

What's Hot

The 7 most common issues families have around the holidays.

Senior Lifestyle Reporter, HuffPost

Family squabbles, whether about misbehaving kids or how much to spend on gifts, are all too common during the holidays.

It’s the most wonderful time of the year... if you get along with your extended family.

The reality for most, though? There’s a lot of room for conflict during the hectic holiday months : Stress levels reach a fever pitch. Long-simmering familial issues can rise to the surface. And there’s always that one relative who thinks it’s appropriate to ask intrusive questions about your personal life over Christmas dinner.

We’re here to help. Below, family therapists share the most common issues relatives face during the holidays and how to deal with each. (Having a tall glass of spiked eggnog in your hand might help, too.)

Issue No. 1: Relatives who rehash old arguments or bring up past mistakes.

Let bygones be bygones should be your motto this time of year. Unfortunately, there’s something about families coming together around the holidays that seems to make people eager to bring up old hurts, arguments and mistakes, said Anna Poss, a therapist in Chicago, Illinois.

Oftentimes, the issues sting: “Mom told me so much about her childhood when she was in hospice care,” an uncle might say. “It’s a shame that more of you weren’t there for her during those last few days.”

The solution: Acknowledge the old hurt in a neutral way― “I’m sorry you feel that way” or “it is unfortunate” for instance ― but then Poss recommends redirecting the conversation.

“Simply bring up a less stressful, more recent topic,” she explained. “If they continue to try to hijack the conversation into negative waters, you can say calmly and directly that you are not interested in that conversation and would rather discuss something else.”

Issue No. 2: Disagreements over how the kids in the family should behave or be disciplined.

Your parenting and discipline style may vary greatly from your relatives’ style and expectations. “How can you let your son talk so disrespectfully to you,” your great aunt might say when your kid speaks his mind in a way you find fine. “You’re his mother!”

The solution: Your parenting style is, of course, no one else’s business. But there’s often generational divides on how kids should behave. If the comments irk you, gracefully remove yourself from the situation, or suggest to your relative that the two of you simply have different disciplinary styles, said Fran Walfish , a family and psychotherapist in Beverly Hills, California, and author of “The Self-Aware Parent.”

If you’re the great aunt in this situation, “remind yourself that it’s not your responsibility to correct the kids in the way they speak to their mother, it’s hers,” Walfish said.

Relatives should be respectful of your parenting style, but meddling is common during the holidays, Walfish said.

Issue No. 3: Relatives who put pressures on others about the future.

Family members, especially older ones, usually have hopes for the next steps you take. It’s understandable ― they’re invested in your life! Oftentimes, these hopes get brought up at holiday gatherings, which isn’t an ideal setting for these loaded, sensitive conversations: “Still single? Do you think you’ll ever get married?” they might say. Or “You’ve been together a few years now, when are you going to have a baby?” Maybe it’s a comment about work: “Are you still at that same job? Have you thought about looking elsewhere?”

While usually well-meaning, the questions come off as intrusive ― and holiday gatherings are neither the time or place for these kinds of conversations, said Mahlet Endale , a licensed psychologist based in Atlanta, Georgia.

Plus, it’s hard to know the backstory, especially if you’re not in regular contact with your relatives: What if the person you’re asking is in a toxic relationship or just got dumped? What if they had a miscarriage recently? What if they want to move on from their job and become a lawyer, but can’t seem to pass the LSAT?

The solution: If you’re the inquiring mind in this situation, ask your relative if they’re interested in talking about the subject, Endale said. If they say yes, pull them aside (no one else need to hear this) and ask questions to understand where they stand on the topic. Then ― and only then ― you can ask for permission to share your thoughts.

“Be aware that someone may say no to any of these questions,” she said. “If that’s the case, invite a conversation to understand why it’s a no and be ready to back off if they’re not ready to discuss this. The more respect you show for what the person needs, the more you show yourself to be a thoughtful and caring.”

If you’re the one being interrogated or receiving unsolicited advice, try to pivot the conversation: Make a joke, or tell your relative you’d rather talk about this later, Endale said. Or you can very clearly state you don’t want to talk about it.

“In most healthy family dynamics, one of these will work in redirecting uncomfortable topics,” she said. “If you know there is a topic you’ve repeatedly been pressured about and you know that it will continue at the holidays despite your request for it to stop, it’s OK for you to think about limiting your family time.”

Issue No. 4: Conflict over whose family you’ll visit in a new relationship

Even couples at the height of the honeymoon phase fall prey to arguments about where they’ll spend the holidays. (This is especially if there’s a big geographic distance between the families.)

It’s a complicated issue that can feel like a game of tug of war, Endale said. On the one hand, the pressure can come from the in-laws. But it also might be an internal conflict between the couple: After years of tradition, it can be hard to spend that first holiday away from your family.

The solution: Set clear manageable expectations early in your relationship about what’s important to you when it comes to all the holidays.

“Sit down with your significant other and have a conversation about what holidays mean to both sides of the family and to each of you,” Endale said. “What family rituals and traditions do you want to see in your partnership? How much travel is realistic in terms of time and finances?”

Once you’ve hashed that out, use the responses to outline a realistic game plan for how you’ll spend the next few holiday seasons.

Map out your plans for the next few holidays as soon as your relationship starts to get serious, Endale said.

Issue No. 5: Arguments or anxiety over how much to spend on gifts

Family budgets vary and that’s never more clear than during the holidays. While buying big-ticket gifts for the whole family might be no big deal for a more well-off family member, for others, straying from their typical budgets with excessive holiday spending is a huge struggle that could easily result in debt.

The solution: Touch base with the adults in the family prior to the holidays, said Becky Stuempfig , a marriage and family therapist in Encinitas, California. This can be a short 20 minute check-in conversation that the family has before they begin their shopping or even an email or group text.

“When you have this talk, bring up ideas for gifts and a maximum spending limit for each person on the list,” Stuempfig said. “I also recommend that families try to avoid last minute shopping. It’s not always possible, but usually families get into the most financial trouble when they make last minute, impulsive buys at the end of the holiday season.”

This planning will pay off in the long run: When you discuss expectations around gifts and really try to be intentional about your spending, it sets the gift-giving tone for years to come, Stuempfig said.

Issue No. 6: Arguments or upset feelings over rehashing embarrassing childhood stories.

Avoid sharing embarrassing stories from someone’s childhood or teen years, especially if they’ve brought a new partner to the holidays. You might want to regale this new person with a story about how your cousin wrote an angsty, emo poem for a crush that wanted nothing to do with him, but your cousin probably doesn’t appreciate the roasting, said Becky Whetstone , a marriage and family therapist in Texas and Little Rock, Arkansas.

The solution: Avoid telling stories about other family members when the theme is not loving, kind or goodnatured, especially when they’ve brought around someone new, Whetstone said.

“Throwing a family member under the story-telling bus is verbal and emotional abuse, and a form of bullying,” she said. “If you’re not sure if you should bring something up, ask your family member’s permission first, in private, and if they say no, don’t do it.”

Issue No. 7: Parents who want to run their adult children lives when they’re back in town.

Blame it on helicopter parenting or just poorly established boundaries, but many parents and grown adult children unknowingly default to their former roles when they’re under one roof for the holidays, said Dea Dean , a marriage and family therapist in Ridgeland, Mississippi.

“Maybe a parent insists that their grown kid stay in town for an extended amount of time, or they make demands about how their twenty-something’s time will be spent once there,” she said. “Other times, a parent might offer unsolicited advice or comment about their child’s appearance, job, relationships or beliefs.”

The solution: Nip this issue in the bud before you head back home to your parents, Dean said.

“A healthy way to address these potential arguments is for both parents and young adult children to communicate about expectations for the holiday before they arrive,” she said. “Young adults can let parents know respectfully and clearly what they’re willing to do and for how long and what they’re willing or unwilling to talk about.”

Dean offed an example. “Maybe you say, ‘In the past we’ve often argued when discussing my career path when I come back home. I appreciate your suggestions and care about what you have to say, but at the same time, I’d like for you to trust me to be resourceful and allow me to come to my own conclusions about my next steps.’”

As for the parents overreaching in this situation, Dean suggests taking a new approach from years past: “You’ll be a lot less likely to face resistance if you frame your wants as ‘desires’ rather than ‘demands,’” she said.

Before You Go

From our partner, huffpost shopping’s best finds, more in life.

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

Connected Home Care

Better Communication, Better Care, Better Quality of Life

Login   CALL NOW: (800)-281-0878

Connected Home Care has joined the HouseWorks family of companies. Now operating as Associated Home Care, the Connected Home Care office location and staff will continue providing quality care with no major service changes to our clients. Learn More

Tips for Visiting Home for the Holidays

home for the holidays

Whether returning home to Massachusetts to visit aging parents for summer vacation, the "Holiday Trifecta" (Thanksgiving and year-end holidays), or at other important milestones throughout the year, holidays can be especially stressful for those of us whose parents may be declining. In some cases, this decline can be as simple as realizing that you need to devote regular efforts to help a loved one manage daily life; in others, we might face the grief of knowing, or fearing, that this may be one of the last holidays together.

Because remote family members visit so often during the summer vacations and holidays, we often receive requests at this time of year to help assess whether someone is still safe, and to identify the kinds of help available and what might be needed. We also notice enormous stress in uncertain adult children hoping to do the right thing with their parents while navigating uncharted waters. We find that it helps to use these holiday and vacation visit guidelines, from how to manage taking a dependent elder a short trip away from home to considering whether a senior can continue to live alone, safely and unaided.

1. Treasure and be present with the person before you

First, it is always good to stop and remember those things that cannot be changed: aging, the effects of some illnesses, the progress of dementia, and other factors. “Old age,” as Betty Davis said, “is not for sissies.” Sometimes we see families whose holidays would improve if they paused briefly to realize that a parent will never again have the health and energy of past times. However, treasured holiday memories can still be created with person before you. Honor that person; try to make him or her comfortable; ask to hear a story, or tell one yourself. Even in advanced stages of illness, holiday experiences can be joyous if accepted for what they are. It is good advice for life in general, and especially with aging loved ones.

2. Assign someone the task to be sure your elder is not over-stimulated

Especially for elders who are not used to being active, and have their own hopes for a holiday experience “like old times”, the temptation to try to keep too fast a pace during a holiday can lead to exhaustion. Be sure that every day someone is prepared to stay at home, or leave an event early; your elder will be happier not trying to keep up with the most energetic members of the family. Try to rotate this responsibility so no one misses too much. It can be an adult child, a younger family member, family friend, or regular caregiver. This is simple, but easy to forget.

3. If the elder is traveling, plan extra time

Whether it is security scans at airports or long car rides, the pace and distractions that many of us take in stride as part of travel can be exhausting, confusing, or frightening for elders. If you are in a rush, the problem is exacerbated. Plan ahead, allow for a slow pace and leisurely pace, and explain what is going on. This can relieve pressure on everyone.

4. If you visit home, be on the lookout for signs that help may be needed

People who visit home after an absence of several months sometimes can see the signs of decline in the condition of the home or the elder. It is important to be on the lookout for these, especially if family is not regularly present. Signs include a poorly-stocked kitchen, plumbing or appliances that do not function and have not been repaired, clutter that may be the initial stages of hoarding, or poor hygiene. Rarely to our elders call and say, “I cannot manage alone and I need help to continue living here.” Far more often, the signs appear without a request for help. If you have concerns about whether someone is safe at home, an assessment by a geriatric care manager or local senior citizens’ service center is called for. One good list of criteria to use to determine whether an assessment is called for was created by Professors Hall, Bossen, and Specht at the University of Iowa College of Nursing. It is available here for those interested: Assessing the Risk of Living Alone .

The holidays with aging parents can be bittersweet. But with proper planning and the right attitude, the emphasis can be on the sweet. Do not try to do too much; find ways to enjoy the person as he or she is today, and to help him or her enjoy the day as much as possible. Grieve if it is called for, laugh when you can, ask for help when you need it. It is all part of life’s pageant.

Connected Home Care | Home Care Services

Main Office 33 Bradford Street Concord, MA 01742

(800) 281-0878

home care alliance of massachusetts logo

© 2024 Connected Home Care, LLC

  • Privacy Policy
  • Terms & Conditions
  • Copyright Notice
  • Equal Opportunity Employer

More From Forbes

During holiday visits, five warning signs your aging parents may need help.

  • Share to Facebook
  • Share to Twitter
  • Share to Linkedin

holiday dinner with family

For many people, the holidays are a time to finally be together in person, post-pandemic. Travel is up and for those who live at a distance from aging loved ones, it may be the first opportunity in awhile to see your elders face to face. It can be very revealing.

Assisted living facilities and home care providers report an annual spike in calls after the holidays. Why? Families see their aging parents are in need of help that the parents did not ask for. Concerned adult children want to find out what help is available and what it costs. It is a time to reckon with the changes aging brings.

If you find yourself in the situation described here, or if you are not even sure what to look for, consider these common warning signs that your aging parent needs assistance.

  • Memory loss . If Dad is repeating the same story over and over or asking the same questions you just answered, Dad has memory loss. It can portend development of dementia. Memory loss that interferes with daily life is a definite red flag, and Dad needs to be medically evaluated for brain changes that may cause loss of independence.
  • Confusion . If you are explaining something simple to your aging loved one, and you get a blank look, or confusion, or you see frustration when your loved one tries to do a basic task and can’t, that’s another red flag. Confusion and memory loss often go together. This makes your loved one vulnerable to harm and it must be taken seriously. It may be another warning sign of dementia possibly developing.
  • Poor hygiene . If your aging loved one was normally fastidious and you see that she now looks unkempt or has not bathed or groomed herself, something is changing. She may need help with bathing or dressing. Loss of the ability to attend to these tasks of daily living is another warning sign that she needs help at home.
  • Stacks of bills, unopened mail or collection notices in their home. As memory loss and confusion develop, elders can forget to pay their bills or attend to the business of their lives. This is clearly dangerous, as insurances can get cancelled, utilities can be cut off or mortgage payments stop. It’s not the elder’s fault of course, but family need to pay attention to what is happening with the paperwork so that serious financial consequences do not happen.
  • Unusual behavior changes . Sometimes a formerly calm elder begins to be highly irritable or aggressive. Temper outbursts, odd crying spells or shouting that was never there before can emerge. These, too, are signs that brain changes may be happening. It is important for the safety of your elder that you get a medical evaluation for her. A volatile aging parent who was not that way before can become a danger to herself or someone else.

Everyone wants holiday visits to be enjoyable for those present. That is what we aspire to. But sometimes, while you are together as a family, you notice things in your aging parents you were not aware of before. This is not to suggest bringing up your concerns over the dinner table. Rather, note what you see as changes, and set aside a time to talk about it with your aging parents as soon as possible after the visit. Family may be all your loved ones have to keep them safe. Generally, they are not going to be the ones who ask you for help. It may be you who must take that initiative.

Best Travel Insurance Companies

Best covid-19 travel insurance plans.

Carolyn Rosenblatt

  • Editorial Standards
  • Reprints & Permissions
  • Parenting Guides
  • Pregnancy & Birth
  • Newborns & Infants
  • Preschoolers
  • Attachment Parenting
  • Communication
  • Connecting with Your Child
  • Discipline That Works
  • Health & Safety
  • Helping Siblings Get Along
  • How To Raise a Child of Character
  • How to Raise an Emotionally Intelligent Child
  • How to Raise an Intelligent Creative Child
  • How To Raise a Socially Intelligent Child
  • Peaceful Parenting
  • Raising a Happy Family
  • Traditions That Bring Families Closer
  • Alcohol and Drugs
  • Anger and Aggression
  • Body Image and Eating
  • Parental Anger
  • Parental Conflict
  • Resilience and Stress
  • Routines and Structure
  • School and Homework
  • Screens, Media and Tech
  • Self-Esteem
  • Sensory Processing
  • Special Needs
  • Talking To Kids About Sex

Visiting Family for the Holidays

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

Hello Dr. Laura,

We're flying with our 18 month old and three year old to my parents for the holidays, and all the relatives will be there. I'm happy for them to meet their cousins, but I'm nervous. I know from experience that they'll be over-stimulated and I'll be defensive about my parenting. Any tips on how to make this easier?

We all want our parents to see how wonderful our kids are. Unfortunately, taking them to visit over the holidays often doesn't really give our children a chance to shine. The kids get off their routines, over-stimulated and disconnected from us. At that point, they're likely to crash and burn.

But there are some tips that will make a smooth visit more likely.

1. Check your own expectations.

If your toddler is teething, he won't suddenly become less whiny. Your very active six year old isn't going to be less active at Grandma's. You can expect your difficult relative to be difficult again this year.

But life doesn't have to be perfect to be good. Your children can act terribly and it doesn't mean you're a terrible parent -- it means they're kids! I bet your parents remember you acting terribly once or twice, and you came out ok.

Your parenting can't be judged by your child's behavior, but only by how you respond to your child. (And none of us should be judged by our worst days!)

2. Print out photos of the folks you'll be seeing and make a little book for your child.

Their faces will be somewhat familiar even though the situation isn't, which makes them feel safer, so they're less reactive. And don't forget to read books about airplanes!

3. Always explain to kids in advance

what will be happening and what kind of behavior is appropriate. For instance, if your parents say grace before the meal and you don't, you'll want to demonstrate, and explain to your children why they'll need to be quiet for a few minutes. Role play with them or make a game of it before you go.

  • "At Grandma's, we use inside voices and we don't run."
  • "What if you don't like a present you're given?"
  • "When you want to leave the table, how do you ask?"
  • "What do you when Uncle Arnold wants to hug you hello?"
  • "What will you do if the cousins start arguing?"

4. Early to bed and early to rise

gives little ones time to explore the house early in the morning while other folks are still in bed. That will make them feel more comfortable even when the place starts hopping. Invite Grandma to see how wonderful your child is when she's rested and not over-whelmed.

5. Reassure the grandparents that their grandchildren are coming out fine.

You're allowed to brag; these are grandparents! In quiet moments with your parents, you can explain anything about your parenting that you know they're having a hard time with, if you have that kind of relationship. Just emphasize that you've given it a lot of thought, and you're parenting this way because you're convinced it leads to kids growing up better adjusted. Thank your parents for supporting you, as they always have. If they give you a hard time, you can remind them lightly that they had their chance, and now it's time for you to make your own mistakes.

6. Since you're flying with the kids

be sure to read this advice on having a painless airplane flight with kids.

7. Keep your kids on their usual schedule as much as possible.

Kids need the security of familiar routines. They're stressed by unfamiliar events and what feels to them like chaotic unpredictability. Do what you can to keep them on schedule and be patient when they get hyped-up or irritable. Be sure everyone (including you!) gets enough sleep.

8. Have age-appropriate expectations.

An 18 month old and a 3 year old can't be expected to sit quietly while you enjoy a long dinner. Talk with the other parents of young children and see if maybe the kids can be excused to watch an acceptable video. Your parents can probably understand that if they're required to stay at the table, either the conversation or the children's behavior (or both) will degenerate.

9. Remember that kids are easily over-stimulated.

Kids need downtime, just to chill out, snuggle, and do whatever relaxes them. If they don't get it, they can't really be blamed for melting down when the over-stimulation gets to them. What does your child do at home to relax? Take a bath? Play with her imaginary friend or his little figurines? Make sure every day includes a little downtime with your child's favorite activity to help her regroup.

Don't plan too many activities. When they get fussy, take them outside to decompress. Remember that laughter reduces the amount of stress hormones circulating in the body, so your child needs some real belly laughing every day to keep the stress of all that new-ness from getting to him.

If he does dissolve into tears, hold and soothe him, and take him into a private place where you won't feel pressured to shush the crying. You'll find that after he gets a chance to express all that tension he'll feel (and act!) much better.

10. Watch your kids' food intake in the midst of too many treats and hyped-up schedules.

Many tantrums originate from hunger. And all parents recognize the sugar high that sends kids bouncing off walls and then crashing into tears. If necessary, speak with grandparents in advance about limiting treats. And carry small protein-rich snacks with you so your child doesn't have a melt-down waiting for dinner to be served.

11. Stay connected.

Your children may love running in a pack with the cousins, which is, after all, one of the delights of family. But be sure to re-connect with them frequently. Feeling disconnected in a strange place can cause even the most resilient child to melt down over something small. Snuggle with your child every morning before getting out of bed. It's very grounding for kids to hear from you how the day is expected to unfold -- even if it will be a lot like yesterday. And bring some favorite books from home to help them reconnect and relax at night.

12. Remember that kids resist force and control.

When we feel like our child is giving us a hard time while others are watching, our impulse is usually to use force, or at least to threaten it. But when we do that, we escalate the upset and insure that our child will argue with us and keep pushing to get her way. If, instead, we can remember that our child is giving us a hard time because she's having a hard time, we can usually "join" with her and avert the crisis. When we take the time to acknowledge our child's feelings, she's much more able to face her disappointment and move on. 

We can say "You were really hoping to finish the movie, but Grandma says it's time to eat....I know you're disappointed...It was at the exciting part, huh?....Do you want to ask Grandma if we can borrow it so you can watch it later?" At worst, she may need to cry a bit and then she'll be ready to come to dinner. For that reason, always give your child plenty of advance warning before transitions.

13. Empathy is your magic wand to de-fuse upsets.

It won't always make challenging feelings disappear, but if you really see things from the other person's perspective -- not necessarily agreeing, or changing your own view, but understanding -- you'll find that the other person becomes more willing to understand your view. This is true for children, but it is also true for your critical aunt or worried father. So when your relatives criticize your child, listen and acknowledge their concern. And when your child balks, always start with empathy and reconnection. You may even find that your critical relatives are astonished at how your empathy helps your child calm down and re-group.

14. Love yourself through it.

Don't forget that family visits can be stressful for you too. Parents have a way of pushing our buttons, even when we're grown. Don't feel like you have to prove yourself to your parents. You're a grown-up now, you're your child's mother or father, and you're the one who has to take the final responsibility about what's best for your child.

Your kids depend on you not only to regulate their environment, but also to help them regulate their moods. So if you're anxious in advance, do some journaling or blow off steam to a friend about your anxieties, so you don't start the visit tense. Forgive yourself in advance for not being perfect. If you find yourself upset during your visit, you might want to use some EFT tapping (here's a link on how to do that: Using EFT with Kids ). Mantras like "I'm a good enough mother!" help us keep our emotional balance. Most of all, make sure to keep your own cup full of self love, so you can handle whatever comes up.

I'm betting your visit won't be perfect, just because life isn't. But if you can just focus on the good things, and shrug off the harder things, you'll be able to enjoy it anyway. Have a lovely holiday!

For more on this topic:  15 Tips for Parenting in Public

"Parenting is always a challenge, but parenting in public, or under the critical gaze of extended family, can be some of the hardest moments."

Photo: Thank you to Ana June!

"I have been reading your articles since my first born came along and she’s now ten. Our household owes so much to you for always guiding us in the right direction. I always read your newsletters and come away with great ideas and reminders every time. My girls are both such wonderful, peaceful, open communicators and I really want to thank you for helping me …and them…achieve that. You’ve always been a source of inspiration in how I want my family to run. Thank you so very much." - Julie Reed
"I wanted to send you a big, big thank you from Italy for making your newsletter accessible for all of us, even those who cannot afford your online course at the moment. I know your newsletter made me a better and more patient mother over the last few years and contributed to a much better relationship with my daughters." - Lillian
"Just want to say that you are a gift to human kind, Dr Laura…Helping us parents to grow better versions of humans (both big and small) which can make the world a better place." - Nadia Mignone
"I have derived a lot of comfort and help from Dr. Markham's material, especially in the Peaceful Parent, Happy Kids course. Thank you for accompanying us on this ongoing journey with your empathy, wisdom and knowledge." - Sarah Bellugi Klima
Dr. Laura is a parent whisperer! - Liz McIntosh

Liz McIntosh

My daughter reacts so much better when I empathize and stay patient. And now I get to model that behavior instead of letting my frustration get the better of me.
Thank you so much for this great advice! You give me ideas for how I can "do it better" and that lifts me up with hope and positivity too!
Today I say thank you, tears streaming from my face, so proud of my little boy and all he will become. Thank you. - Jennifer B.
Your philosophies are the only tools we've come across which offer practical advice grounded in clearly laid out lay terminology. Our family life day-to-day is nothing short of a miracle, thanks to you! - Dana Questad

Dana Questad

Your weekly Aha-parenting magazine always gives me strength and helps me look at life the bright way! - Fleur Speet, Amsterdam

Fleur Speet, Amsterdam

Dr. Laura's Parenting Tips

Free weekly inspiration in your inbox. Give yourself the support you need, to be the parent you want to be.

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

Peaceful Parent Happy Kids Online Course

  • 12 weeks of practical support & tools
  • Live Group Call with Dr. Laura
  • 60 audio inspirations & Private FB group

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

Author of three best-selling books

Avg. 4.6 out of 5 stars

Karyl McBride Ph.D.

How to Deal with Parental Narcissism During the Holidays

10 tips to help you maintain your authentic self..

Posted November 21, 2022 | Reviewed by Gary Drevitch

  • What Is Narcissism?
  • Find a therapist who understands narcissism.
  • Many adult children of narcissistic parents’ report struggling with holidays.
  • It is important to set boundaries with dysfunctional family members.
  • There are ways to maintain your sense of self and not get pulled into a narcissistic web.

Shutterstock/LightField Studios

If you come from a narcissistic family, meaning a family led by a mother or father who is a narcissist, you are probably starting to either dread the approaching holidays or worry about how to handle family gatherings. Pre-holiday anxiety is common in other types of dysfunctional families as well: Will your uncle drink too much again this year? Will there be angry arguments with no resolution? Will you get triggered by the hostile dynamics of your unhealthy family? Will the family expect you to play “your role” in the family—the one you were assigned as a child? Can you manage to be yourself at a holiday get-together and maintain your authenticity with grace?

These are the kinds of concerns I begin to hear from clients right after Halloween. Those who come from dysfunctional families headed by a narcissistic parent worry about how they’ll get through the holidays with their sanity and self-respect intact. They may wish they could look forward to a holiday celebration surrounded by loving, respectful, generous, caring relatives, but unfortunately that rarely, if ever, is the case for adult children of a narcissist. So I counsel clients that our sanity, mental health, and well-being are an inside job. The more we are able to engage in recovery from the trauma of being raised in a narcissistic family, the easier our lives become and the more able we are to handle difficult situations with family members.

Parental narcissism essentially means this: The parent’s needs take precedence over the child’s needs. A narcissistic family is one in which other members of the family become entangled in the narcissist’s web, often enabling the narcissistic parent’s behavior. ( My upcoming book, Will the Drama Ever End?: Untangling and Healing from the Harmful Effects of Parental Narcissism , explains the dynamics of the narcissistic family in further detail.) Children who grow up in this unfortunate environment do not get their emotional needs met and are left with trauma that must be resolved in their adulthood if they are to lead authentic, fulfilling lives. Children and adult children from narcissistic families are accustomed to a lack of empathy; parental entitlement; grandiose, dishonest, superficial behavior; envy and lack of support; criticism and judgment; being taken advantage of; not feeling valued for who they are but rather for what they can do; and feeling that to gain acceptance they must provide excessive admiration for the narcissistic parent. Not a very happy holiday, right?

Several of my clients who have endured such parental behavior have reported how they are anticipating the upcoming holidays:

Nick, 45, the son of a narcissistic father, told me, “I have avoided being with my family for the last several years while I’ve been working on my recovery. This year, my wife and I decided to go to my parents for the holidays, so I had to prepare her and my children for what my family is like. I had to warn them about my narcissistic father, explaining that he will likely talk only about himself and what he thinks are his amazing accomplishments. He won’t ask about us or act interested if we talk about what we’re doing. My mom will enable and support him, and the whole family will orbit around his needs. I realize that my wife and kids won’t really understand what my family is like until they actually see it play out in real life. I wonder if it’s even worth it getting together at all, but I’m going to give it a try. I know I will have to stay very neutral, not be vulnerable to their judgments, and stand up for myself if I have to.”

Ruth Ann, 36, told me that going home to her family at the holidays was usually a nightmare, so she was trying to decide what to do this year: “I know what’s most important for Mom is that everything be absolutely perfect, according to her standards. She will expect us all to look the part of the big, wonderful family, and she’ll be critical if we don’t dress up, so I’ll have to make sure the kids are groomed to the max. Of course, there will be pictures taken to show off on Facebook . Then, after the meal, my narcissistic mom will expect praises to fall at her feet for her incredible cooking and preparations, she’ll expect endless thank-yous, and everything will be all about her. I will be expected to take orders and do what she requests without question. And what’s most hurtful is that no one in the rest of the family sees anything wrong with her behavior or her expectation that all of us should just fall into line. They just go along as if everything is normal, which makes it super uncomfortable for me and my kids. We really can’t be appreciated for who we are or be our authentic selves in this environment, so I really don’t want to go.”

Adult children of narcissistic families struggle with how to be themselves at family gatherings. They typically hope that things will be different this time around, only to find that nothing has changed: Their narcissistic parent has not altered their behavior, and enabling family members continue orbiting around the narcissist. The only thing that can change is an adult child’s own recovery, which includes insight regarding their narcissistic family dynamic and tips for how to cope during family get-togethers.

Let’s look at some of those recovery tips:

10 Tips for Maintaining Your Authentic Self with a Narcissistic Parent

  • Think ahead about what boundaries you may have to set and keep.
  • Don’t be too vulnerable in sharing your life and current issues.
  • Stop any kind of emotional abuse if it occurs, and leave if it doesn’t stop or a fight begins.
  • Don’t engage in arguments or get drawn into the drama.
  • Practice being yourself, but if criticism or judgment comes your way, stand up for yourself in a kind and gentle way.
  • If you need to express feelings, use I statements, such as “I am not comfortable with that” or “I feel hurt by that comment," and don’t tell other people what to do.
  • If you have children, keep guard closely so the kids are always protected from judgment.
  • Try not to get pulled into the narcissistic web of how you used to act or react in the family; rather, try to be more of an observer outside that dysfunctional web.
  • If you find yourself getting triggered, try not to be reactive; rather, observe and journal about it later.
  • Try to be aware of others’ projections that have nothing to do with you.

Make your own memories this holiday season, stay in the moment, and celebrate your authentic self. Remember: Recovery work is the key and so worth it.

Karyl McBride Ph.D.

Karyl McBride, Ph.D. , is a licensed marriage and family therapist and author of Will I Ever Be Good Enough? Healing the Daughters of Narcissistic Mothers .

  • Find a Therapist
  • Find a Treatment Center
  • Find a Psychiatrist
  • Find a Support Group
  • Find Teletherapy
  • United States
  • Brooklyn, NY
  • Chicago, IL
  • Houston, TX
  • Los Angeles, CA
  • New York, NY
  • Portland, OR
  • San Diego, CA
  • San Francisco, CA
  • Seattle, WA
  • Washington, DC
  • Asperger's
  • Bipolar Disorder
  • Chronic Pain
  • Eating Disorders
  • Passive Aggression
  • Personality
  • Goal Setting
  • Positive Psychology
  • Stopping Smoking
  • Low Sexual Desire
  • Relationships
  • Child Development
  • Therapy Center NEW
  • Diagnosis Dictionary
  • Types of Therapy

January 2024 magazine cover

Overcome burnout, your burdens, and that endless to-do list.

  • Coronavirus Disease 2019
  • Affective Forecasting
  • Neuroscience
  • Best of Senior Living
  • Most Friendly
  • Best Meals and Dining
  • Best Activities
  • How Our Service Works
  • Testimonials
  • Leadership Team
  • News & PR

10 Signs Your Elderly Parent Needs Help

LIMITED TIME OFFER-Black Friday Sale

Join AARP for just $9 per year with a 5-year membership.Join now and get a FREE GIFT.

Help icon

  • right_container

Work & Jobs

Social Security

AARP en Español

Help icon

  • Membership & Benefits
  • AARP Rewards
  • AARP Rewards %{points}%

Conditions & Treatments

Drugs & Supplements

Health Care & Coverage

Health Benefits

woman and man working out at a gym

Staying Fit

Your Personalized Guide to Fitness

Hearing Resource Center

AARP Hearing Center

Ways To Improve Your Hearing

Woman with her hands on her lap and sitting on a couch

Mental Health Resources

Coping with Depression and Anxiety

illustration of woman drawing smile on face

Mental Health

25 Great Ways to Find Happiness

Scams & Fraud

Personal Finance

Money Benefits

zoomed in map of the united states with map locator pins scattered around

View and Report Scams in Your Area

Tax-Aide Group Illustration

AARP Foundation Tax-Aide

Free Tax Preparation Assistance

a man and woman at home looking at a laptop together

AARP Money Map

Get Your Finances Back on Track

a grouping of white appliances including refrigerator, oven, washing machine, microwave, vacuum, electric tea kettle, radiator

Budget & Savings

Make Your Appliances Last Longer

Small Business

Age Discrimination

at cashier smiles at a customer

Flexible Work

10 Part-Time Jobs to Beat Inflation

A woman smiling while sitting at a desk

AARP Skills Builder

Online Courses to Boost Your Career

An older women at a job interview with people looking at her resume

Age Proof Your Resume

a red and white illustration showing a woman in a monitor flanked by a word bubble and a calendar

Live Q&A

Tips to Enhance Your Job Search

green arrows pointing up overlaid on a Social Security check and card with two hundred dollar bills

Get More out of Your Benefits

A balanced scale with a clock on one side and a ball of money on the other, is framed by the outline of a Social Security card.

When to Start Taking Social Security

Mature couple smiling and looking at a laptop together

10 Top Social Security FAQs

Social security and calculator

Social Security Benefits Calculator

arrow shaped signs that say original and advantage pointing in opposite directions

Medicare Made Easy

Original vs. Medicare Advantage

illustration of people building a structure from square blocks with the letters a b c and d

Enrollment Guide

Step-by-Step Tool for First-Timers

the words inflation reduction act of 2022 printed on a piece of paper and a calculator and pen nearby

Prescription Drugs

9 Biggest Changes Under New Rx Law

A doctor helps his patient understand Medicare and explains all his questions and addresses his concerns.

Medicare FAQs

Quick Answers to Your Top Questions

Care at Home

Financial & Legal

Life Balance

Long-term care insurance information, form and stethoscope.

LONG-TERM CARE

​Understanding Basics of LTC Insurance​

illustration of a map with an icon of a person helping another person with a cane navigate towards caregiving

State Guides

Assistance and Services in Your Area

a man holding his fathers arm as they walk together outside

Prepare to Care Guides

How to Develop a Caregiving Plan

Close up of a hospice nurse holding the hands of one of her patients

End of Life

How to Cope With Grief, Loss

Recently Played

Word & Trivia

Atari® & Retro

Members Only

Staying Sharp

More About Games

AARP Right Again Trivia and AARP Rewards

Right Again! Trivia

AARP Right Again Trivia Sports and AARP Rewards

Right Again! Trivia – Sports

Atari, Centipede, Pong, Breakout, Missile Command Asteroids

Atari® Video Games

Throwback Thursday Crossword and AARP Rewards

Throwback Thursday Crossword

Travel Tips

Vacation Ideas

Destinations

Travel Benefits

a graphic of two surf boards in the sand on a beach in Hawaii.

Beach vacation ideas

Vacations for Sun and Fun

mary steenburgen jane fonda diane keaton and candice bergen taking a selfie in front of the trevi fountain in rome italy in the movie the book club two the next chapter

Follow the Set-Jetting Trend

left a bobcat at the arizona sonara desert museum right sunset skyline of downtown tucson arizona

AARP City Guide

Discover Tucson, Arizona

big cruise ship on water

AARP Smart Guide to Cruises

Tips for Planning, Packing and Landing

Entertainment & Style

Family & Relationships

Personal Tech

Home & Living

Celebrities

Beauty & Style

from left to right top to bottom killers of the flower moon then the color purple then oppenheimer then nyad then rustin then barbie

Movies for Grownups

Movies for Grownups Awards Winners

Carol Burnett in "Palm Royale," Kate Winslet in "The Regime," Hiroyuki Sanada in "Shōgun" and Sofia Vergara in "Griselda."

TV for Grownups

New Shows to Watch in 2024

watercolor illustration of a person in a green jacket and boots on a beach with two people and a headland in the distance; cover of ann cleeves' the raging storm overlaid on the illustration

Free Online Novel

Read 'The Raging Storm'

a person in bed giving a thumbs up

Sex & Dating

Spice Up Your Love Life

a woman holding onto a family tree when her branch has been cut off

Navigate All Kinds of Connections

illustration of person exercising in room with bookcase, chair with cat on it, end table, plant, treadmill, weight rack and workout bench

How to Create a Home Gym

a woman looks at her phone while taking her medication

Store Medical Records on Your Phone?

Close-up of Woman's hands plugging a mobile phone into a power bank  in a bar

Maximize the Life of Your Phone Battery

online dating safety tips

Virtual Community Center

Join Free Tech Help Events

a hygge themed living room

Create a Hygge Haven

from left to right cozy winter soups such as white bean and sausage soup then onion soup then lemon coriander soup

Soups to Comfort Your Soul

front exterior of home with colorful landscaping

AARP Smart Guide

38 Ways to Boost Home's Curb Appeal

Driver Safety

Maintenance & Safety

Trends & Technology

Tim Edmonson poses for a portrait next to his electric car charging station at his Castle Rock home

Is Now the Time to Buy an Electric Car?

Talk

We Need To Talk

Assess Your Loved One's Driving Skills

AARP

AARP Smart Driver Course

A woman using a tablet inside by a window

Building Resilience in Difficult Times

A close-up view of a stack of rocks

Tips for Finding Your Calm

A woman unpacking her groceries at home

Weight Loss After 50 Challenge

AARP Perfect scam podcast

Cautionary Tales of Today's Biggest Scams

Travel stuff on desktop: map, sun glasses, camera, tickets, passport etc.

7 Top Podcasts for Armchair Travelers

jean chatzky smiling in front of city skyline

Jean Chatzky: ‘Closing the Savings Gap’

a woman at home siting at a desk writing

Quick Digest of Today's Top News

A man and woman looking at a guitar in a store

AARP Top Tips for Navigating Life

two women exercising in their living room with their arms raised

Get Moving With Our Workout Series

You are now leaving AARP.org and going to a website that is not operated by AARP. A different privacy policy and terms of service will apply.

Juggling Family Holiday Traditions

How adult kids are changing the way.

Juggling Family Holiday Traditions

When it comes to the holidays and our millennial children , the classic song lyrics "Over the river and through the woods to Grandmother's house we go" need an update.

Rather than visit, the kids may ask us to do the traveling. If they do come to us, there's a good chance it won't be on the actual holiday.

Image Alt Attribute

AARP Membership

LIMITED TIME OFFER

Flash Sale! Join AARP today for $16 per year. Get instant access to members-only products and hundreds of discounts, a free second membership, and a subscription to AARP The Magazine.

For parents of adult children, the holidays can mean abandoning decades-long traditions, and that's not without some angst. But parents need to adapt to the changing family dynamic, says clinical psychotherapist  Deanna Brann , author of Reluctantly Related . "Parents can't assume that the traditions they've always had are going to continue."

Parents may maintain that assumption because their holiday routines have continued for so long, often into their children's 20s. College students and young adults flock home until they get married. Then the changes start.

Parents should anticipate that newlyweds will have their own plans. Brann suggests asking them well in advance if they've thought about the holidays as a married couple, considering there's now another family in the mix. They might not have an immediate answer, but it will get them thinking.

The changes don't end with the arrival of in-laws. When grandchildren arrive, the pattern needs altering again. While some couples are happy to bundle up the babies and head over the hill to Grandma's, usually there comes a time when the family wants to be in their own living room to celebrate Hanukkah, Kwanzaa or Christmas.

Parents might feel out of the loop, wondering if they are invited. Brann suggests asking an open-ended question: "We'd love to come to your house. What day works best?"

For several years, her son and his wife lived several states away. After they had children, they welcomed Brann, her husband and the other grandparents but asked them to arrive after 2 p.m. on Christmas. The young couple wanted to celebrate in the morning with just their children.

newsletter-naw-tablet

AARP NEWSLETTERS

newsletter-naw-mobile

%{ newsLetterPromoText  }%

%{ description }%

Privacy Policy

ARTICLE CONTINUES AFTER ADVERTISEMENT

"Adult children have the right to create their own traditions, and parents need to be respectful of that," Brann says.

However, if your son and his new family always celebrate with his wife's relatives on the actual holiday, then that can cause hurt feelings on the husband's side. "If spending the actual holiday is important to his wife, then the husband is usually willing to go along," Brann says. "His goal in life is to make his wife happy . Where he spends the day is just not that important to most men."

AARP® Dental Insurance Plan administered by Delta Dental Insurance Company

Dental insurance plans for members and their families

Her advice: Don't take it personally if you don't see your adult children on a specific day.

That flexibility has been the guiding principle for Debbie, the mother of four sons in their 30s. Debbie (who prefers not to reveal her last name) has found that managing the holidays requires strategic planning. Two of her sons are married with young children and live hours away; the two unmarried sons live nearby. Each year seems to bring more moving parts, with husbands and wives working, children in day care and school, and the young parents establishing their own Christmas morning traditions.

"We start talking in October. I'd like to start in September, but no one else wants to," Debbie says with a laugh. The strategizing is done via group emails and texts.

Debbie and her husband defer to their children. "We don't want them to feel pressure to come home for a specific day. We also don't expect everyone to be together."

Ultimately, the family gets together in various configurations every year — sometimes at Debbie's house, other times at another family's home. A plus: "The celebration goes on all Christmas week," she says, "and it seems like the holiday never ends."

Mary W. Quigley, a journalist and author, has written two books about motherhood and work. A New York University journalism professor, she is the mother of three adult children and blogs at Mothemothering21.com .

Discover AARP Members Only Access

Already a Member? Login

AARP VALUE &

MEMBER BENEFITS

scrambled eggs, cheddar cheese, bacon strips, sausage links, hash browns, 4 pieces of white bread toast

Denny's

15% off dine-in and pickup orders

A happy couple in white summer clothing on vacation walks along a wooden pier over tropical, turquoise ocean in the Maldives, Indian Ocean

AARP Travel Center Powered by Expedia: Vacation Packages

$50 gift card of your choice when booking any flight package

man sitting on couch looking at woman sitting on floor in living room during day time

ADT™ Home Security

Savings on monthly home security monitoring

couple on couch looking at tablet

AARP® Staying Sharp®

Activities, recipes, challenges and more with full access to AARP Staying Sharp®

SAVE MONEY WITH THESE LIMITED-TIME OFFERS

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

3 câu trả lời 428

Câu hỏi hot cùng chủ đề.

  • Hỏi từ APP VIETJACK John began playing the piano ten years ago.John has... Trả lời (20) Xem đáp án » 13 32501

Unit 1: MY NEW SCHOOL A. PHONETICS Put the words with the underlined part into the correct column. . /əʊ/ /ʌ/ ………………………………………………. ………………………………………………. ………………………………………………. ………………………………………………. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Put the words below into the correct verb group. 1. play: 2. do: 3. have: 4. study: II. School subjects. A. Do you know the subjects? What are their Vietnamese equivalents? 1. Art: 2. English: 3. Geography: 4. History: 5. Maths: 6. Music: 7. PE (Physical Education): 8. Science: 9. ICT (Information and Communication Technology): B. Do you know any more subjects? Write them down. C. Ask and answer the questions. 1. Which subjects do you do at school? 2. What's your favourite subject? 3. What's your favourite school day? II. Complete the words of school things. 1. t¬¬¬_ _ _ _ _ r 2. d _ _ k 3. r _ l _ r 4. p _ n 5. r _ bb _ r 6. s _ _ _ _ _ t 7. p _ _ _ _ l c_ _ e 8. _ a _ _u _ a _ or 9. b _ _ k 10. ch _ _ r. IV. Look at the picture. Write the number of the people and school things. teacher board paper rubber student chair ruler pencil case desk book notebook computer school bag pencil pen V. What are these things? Write the words in the spaces. 1. a small book to write things you want to remember : 2. a small electronic machine for calculating figures : 3. a small piece of rubber you use for removing pencil : marks from paper 4. a soft container in which a student carries books and : other things for study 5. a device used for drawing circles : 6. a vehicle with two wheels, which you sit on and ride : by moving your legs 7. a straight piece of wood or plastic that you use for : drawing straight lines 8. a box for storing pens, pencils, erasers, etc. : 9. a tool for making pencils sharper : 10. a book that contains information about a subject : VI. Write the -ing form of the verb. 1. watch 2. listen 3. swim 4. go 5. have 6. skip 7. ride 8. sit VII. Complete the sentences with the -ing form of the verbs. Use short forms. Example: Come round to my place - we're listening to music. (listen) 1. Look! The dog in the river! (swim) 2. Don't disturb me! I a good book. (read) 3. She her holiday. (enjoy) 4. They a computer game. (play) 5. You your homework. (do) 6. Look! The girls in the schoolyard. (skip) 7. Ssh! They in the library. (study) 8. Listen! Someone at the door. (knock) VIII. Complete the sentences with am, is or are. 1. A: Where's Jack? B: He playing football. 2. A: Let's play table tennis. B: Sorry. We having dinner now. 3. A: Where are Linda and Kate? B: They shopping. 4. A: Are you OK? B: Yes, I having great fun. 5. A: Please help me. B: Sorry. I reading a book. 6. A: Can I talk to Lan? B: She isn't at home. She riding her bike. IX. Complete the sentences with the verbs in the present continuous. 1. Right now John basketball with the school team. 2. Mary breakfast? It's time to go to school. 3. Andy and Amy a DVD. They're playing computer game. 4. Which CD you to? 5. Please be quiet! I my book. 6. What language she ? X. Put the words in the correct order. 1. my/ I/ doing/ homework/ love. 2. to/ cinema/ They/ going/ like/ the. 3. watching/ don't/ We/ TV/ like. 4. like/ sister/ reading/ doesn't/ My/ magazines. 5. dad/ music/ enjoys/ My/ to/ listening/ country. 6. enjoy/ on/ They/ photos/ taking/ holiday. XI. Write the verbs in the negative form. Example: I'm enjoying my holiday.  I'm not enjoying my holiday. 1. He's doing his homework. 2. They are playing tennis. 3. Linda's having breakfast now. 4. Steve's sleeping. 5. We're listening to the teacher. 6. It's raining. 7. The students are doing morning exercises. 8. She's interviewing some students. XII. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb: go, play, help, have. l. Our cat football! 2. I computer games in the evening. 3. I my sister with her homework. 4. My sister me to clean my bike. 5. We a new classmate, Mai. 6. We to school from Mondays to Fridays. 7. My father to work at 7 o'clock every morning. 8. On Sundays, my sister shopping. XIII. Complete the sentences with the negative form of the verb. Example: He likes Science, but he doesn't like History. l. She speaks English, but she French. 2. I understand Maths, but I Science. 3. He helps me with Science, but he me with Maths. 4. I borrow books about English, but I books about History. 5. You play the guitar, but you the piano. XIV. Match the questions and answers. Write the answer in each blank. l. Are they cooking dinner? a. No, they aren't. They're cooking dinner. 2. Is he disturbing you? b. No, I'm not. 3. Are you listening to music? c. No, I'm not. I'm doing my English homework. 4. Are they watching TV? d. Yes, he is. He loves Italy. 5. Are you doing your Maths homework? e. No, they aren't. They're watching TV. 6. Is he enjoying his holiday? f. No, he isn't. XV. Match the questions and answers. Write the answer in each blank. 1. What are you watching? a. I like programmes about History. 2. What kind of programmes do you watch? b. To my friend's house. 3. Where are you going? c. Every day. 4. Where does she live? d. A programme about animals. 5. Who are you talking with? e. A friend from school. 6. How often do you ride your bicycle to school? f. 24, High Street. XVI. Complete the sentences with the present simple or the present continuous form the verbs. 1. They often their parents in the holidays. (visit) 2. I really cooking. (like) 3. He can't speak on the phone because he a shower. (have) 4. Look at that man. He a horse. (ride) 5. We sometimes to the cinema on Sunday. (go) 6. I about three DVDs a week. (watch) 7. We tennis now. (play) 8. Right now we French. (speak) 9. I sometimes the guitar in a band. (play) 10. When Susie usually her homework? (do) 11. I German. (not understand) 12. they chocolate ice cream? (like) C. SPEAKING I. Complete the following conversations. A. Nam: Good morning, Miss Hong. Miss Hong: (1) , Nam. (2) are (3) ? Nam: I'm (4) , (5) . And you? Miss Hong: (6) , thanks. B. You: Hi, Mai. (1) our new classmate. Her name is Hoa. Mai: (2) , Hoa. Hoa: (3) , Mai. C. Nam: Hello, Hung. Hung: Hi. Nice to (1) you again. Nam, this is Ba. Ba: (2) , Nam. (3) to meet you. Nam: Hi. Where are you (4) ? Ba: I am from Nha Trang. I am new here. Nam: What class are you (5) ? Ba: I'm (6) Class 6A. Hung: Yeah. He is our (7) classmate. Nam: Oh, we are (8) to have you in our class. II. Practice the sample conversation between Tom and Susan. Then work with a partner, prepare and practice a telephone conversation. Use your own ideas. Tom: Hi, Tom speaking. Susan: Hi, Tom. It's Susan here. What are you doing? Tom: I'm playing Super Hero III. It's great. Susan: Oh, can I come to your place? Tom: Sure. III. Fill in the blanks with correct words or phrases, and then practise the conversations. l. TV programmes. A: I'm watching . It's great! B: I'm watching . It's fantastic! 2. Music. A: I'm listening to . It's great B: I'm listening to . It's wonderful! 3. Computer games. A: I'm playing . It's great! B: I'm playing . It's fantastic. IV. Work with a partner. Ask and answer the questions. 1. What language do you usually speak with your family? 2. What language are you speaking now 3. What music do you usually listen to? 4. What music are you listening to now? 5. Who are you sitting next to right now. 6. Who do you usually sit next to at dinner? D. READING I. Read Tim's diary and decide if the sentences below are T (True) or F (False).

Monday: It's Monday evening. I'm very happy. A great day at school. And a good film on TV! Tuesday: I'm so angry. A lot of homework! Wednesday: I'm nervous. A test is on Friday. Thursday: Today I'm OK. Have a good time with my classmates! Friday: I'm not sad. I'm happy. Great test! Saturday and Sunday: Cool weekend. I'm very happy. l. On Monday Tim is happy. 2. On Tuesday he is angry and nervous. 3. On Wednesday he is nervous. A test is on Friday. 4. On Thursday he is not OK. 5. On Friday he is angry. 6. On Saturday and Sunday he is very happy. II. Read the conversation, and then circle the correct answers. Kate: Hello! (Kate's speaking.) Linda: Hi, Kate. It's Linda here. How are things? Kate: OK. I'm doing some homework and I'm not enjoying it! Linda: Oh sorry. Am I disturbing you? Kate: No. you aren't. It's OK. Linda: Oh good. Listen, do you have Jack's phone number? Kate: Yeah. I do. Just a moment. Ready? It's 8693 2210. D. READING I. Read Tim's diary and decide if the sentences below are T (True) or F (False). Monday: It's Monday evening. I'm very happy. A great day at school. And a good film on TV! Tuesday: I'm so angry. A lot of homework! Wednesday: I'm nervous. A test is on Friday. Thursday: Today I'm OK. Have a good time with my classmates!

Friday: I'm not sad. I'm happy. Great test! Saturday and Sunday: Cool weekend. I'm very happy. l. On Monday Tim is happy. 2. On Tuesday he is angry and nervous. 3. On Wednesday he is nervous. A test is on Friday. 4. On Thursday he is not OK. 5. On Friday he is angry. 6. On Saturday and Sunday he is very happy. II. Read the conversation, and then circle the correct answers. Kate: Hello! (Kate's speaking.) Linda: Hi. Kate. It's Linda here. How are things? Kate: OK. I'm doing some homework and I'm not enjoying it! Linda: Oh sorry. Am I disturbing you? Kate: No. you aren't, It's OK. Linda: Oh good. Listen, do you have Jack's phone number? Kate: Yeah. I do. Just a moment. Ready? It's 8693 2210. Linda: 8693 2210. Thanks. Kate: Why do you want Jack's number? Linda: It’s Steve's birthday next weekend. I want to buy him something. Kate: Ah, clever you! You want to ask Jack what Steve likes. Linda: That's right. Kate: Ok. But you can't talk to him now. He's playing football. Phone him after lunch. 1. Kate is writing letters/ doing homework. 2. Linda is/ isn't disturbing Kate. 3. Jack's phone number is 8693 2210/8693 2110. 4. It's Steve's birthday tomorrow/ next weekend. 5. Linda wants to buy a present for Steve/ Jack. 6. She knows/ doesn't know what to buy Steve. E. WRITING I. Make sentences using the words and phrases given to write an article about Nguyen Binh Khiem Primary School. 1. Nguyen Binh Khiem Primary School/ District 1/ Ho Chi Minh City. 2. It/ have/ 36 classes/ over 800 students. 3. School/ have/ contest called “Students Love Science”. 4. 180 second, third, fourth graders/ enter/ contest. 5. School/ make/ each school day/ exciting day/ the students. II. Write a short paragraph about the school rules, using the present simple tense. 1. try to arrive on time for school and lessons. 2. work hard, and allow others to do the same. 3. try to be polite to teachers, each other and visitors. 4. follow the instructions from the teachers. 5. wear the school uniform when we come to school. 6. keep the school buildings and grounds clean and tidy. 7. have good behavior all the time. 8. not to take foods or drinks into classrooms. 9. not to use mobile phones inside the school buildings. 10. not to smoke at school or at home. Answers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. III. Write about your dream school using the words or phrases given. 1. have good teachers/ help students/ get interested/ subject. 2. have outdoor/ indoor activities. 3. students/ try/ be/ active. 4. students/ learn/ both/ theory/ practice/ all subjects. 5. students/ use tablets/ instead/ books. 6. good canteen/ supply/ healthy food. 7. good library/ help/ develop/ talents of students. 8. students/ use/ sport facilities/ free time.   TEST (UNIT 1) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1. A. nice B. bicycle C. rides D. live 2. A. mine B. history C. exercise D. library 3. A. come B. month C. mother D. open 4. A. hope B. homework C. one D. post 5. A. brother B. judo C. going D. rode 6. A. subject B. club C. put D. lunch 7. A. science B. like C. music D. ice 8. A. fun B. student C. hungry D. sun 9. A. teacher B. chess C. lunch D. school. 10. A. farm B. after C. walk D. class II. Choose the correct answers. 11. Phong is wearing a school . A. shoes B. uniform C. bag D. hats 12. I am having a Maths lesson but I forgot my . I have some difficulty. A. calculator B. bicycle C. pencil case D. pencil sharpener 13. In Physics, we have a lot of . A. books - to have B. homework - to do C. science - to study D. vocabulary - to play 14. morning exercise is good for you. A. Doing B. Studying C. Playing D. Having 15. At lunchtime, you can lunch in the school canteen. A. go B. be C. have D. do 16. Mai and Hoa their bicycles to school from Monday to Friday. A. rides B. ride C. is riding D. are riding 17. Nam's new school a large . A. has - playground B. have - playgrounds C. is having - playgrounds D. are having - playground 18. I often my homework school. A. study - at B. am doing - after C. do - after D. does - before 19. In the afternoon, I books the library. A. am reading - at B. read - in C. reads - at D. are reading - in 20. Look! They badminton with their friends. A. play B. plays C. playing D. are playing 21. What is your subject at school? A. nice B. favourite C. liking D. excited 22. Students live and study in a/an school. They only go home at weekends.. A. international B. small C. boarding D. overseas 23. In the afternoon, students many interesting clubs. A. join B. do C. play D. have 24. Creative students drawings and paintings in the club. A. do - sport B. join - English C. do -art D. play - judo 25. We are excited the first day of school. A. at B. about C. with D. in 26. My parents often help me my homework. A. with B. about C. at D. in 27. Nam football now. He's tired.. A. doesn’t play B. plays C. is playing D. isn’t playing 28. Listen! Someone at the door. A. knocks B. knock C. is knocking D. are knocking 29. My brother and I our bicycles to school now. A. ride B. am riding C. are riding D. is riding 30. Mr. Khang our class Maths. A. teach B. teaches C. does D. starts III. Fill the blanks with am, is, are, do, does, have. 31. How you go to school every day? 32. you hungry? 33. your brother like pop music? 34. Where you go shopping? 35. I having lunch with my new friends. 36. Now Mai watching a video clip about science. 37. Nam and Duy not doing their homework. 38. We often Maths lessons on Mondays. 39. Mr. Minh our favourite teacher. He teaches Science. 40. What you usually do at break time? IV. Complete each of the following sentences with ONE suitable word. 41. us about your new school. 42. In the afternoon students do sports in the . 43. We are about our first day at school. 44. He looks smart in his new school . 45. In Maths lessons, I bring my calculator, ruler, and . 46. Do you often your bicycle to school? 47. They are going to a new school library. 48. The school year in Viet Nam on September 5th. 49. Do you keep when your teacher is explaining the lessons? 50. Do you often help your classmates their homework? Answer A B

51. Do you like pop music? 52. When does school start? 53. What is your favourite subject at school? 54. What do you usually do at break time? 55. How many students does the school have? 56. What is your school day like? 57. What are you doing now? 58. Do you wear your school uniform when you go to school? 59. What time do they go home? 60. How do you get to school every day? a. I read in the library. b. Maths. c. It's very interesting. d. Yes, I do. e. We are having a History lesson. f. Over 800 students. g. Yes, of course. h. At 4 o'clock every day.

i. By bicycle. j. School starts again next Tuesday. V. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B.

VI. Complete the conversation, and then practise it with your partner. Kate: (61) ? Jack: By bicycle. How about you, Kate? Kate: I walk (62) every day. My house is near our school. Jack: (63) ? Kate: It's Maths. Mr. Nam teaches it and he's our favourite teacher. (64) , Jack? Jack: I play football with my classmates in the school playground. Kate: Great! I often play badminton with my classmates. (65) , Jack? Jack: I go home at 4.30 in the afternoon every day. Mary: (66) , Jack? Jack: After school, have dinner and do my homework. Mary: (67) , Jack? Jack: Yes, I remember all our new classmates' names. (68) , Mary? Mary: Oh, yes, When they forget things. I can help them. Jack: (69) , Mary? Mary: Not much. I don't have much pocket money. (70) , Jack? Jack: Yes, I am. Let's go to the canteen and have something to eat, Mary. VII. Make sentences using the words and phrases given. 71. They/ often/ morning exercise/ do. 72. Nam/ play football/ school team. 73. My sister/ play/ piano/ weekends/ at. 74. I/ study/ Maths/ English/ History/ Mondays/ on. 75. We/ eat lunch/ school canteen/ lunch time/ in. 76. We/ read/ library/ break time/ at. 77. wear/ uniform/ school/ every day. 78. Today/ Mai/ not/ wear/ uniform. 79. I/ excited/ first day/ school/ at. 80. Susan's favourite teacher/ Science teacher. Unit 2: MY HOME A. PHONETICS Ticks () the correct column for the underlined part of the word. /s/ /z/ /iz/ does gets up Goes Has Lives looks plays starts finishes misses speaks teaches writes thinks watches washes sings walks Sits moves rooms houses chairs attics desks buildings apartments chests laptops clocks B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR. I. In which room can you find these things. 1. cooker, fridge 2. wardrobe, bed 3. armchair, TV 4. bath, bath-tub 5. car, bicycle

II. Put the words or phrases in the correct columns. Some words have more than one answer. III. Look at the picture. Complete the sentences with the words in the box. l. There are some plates the sink. 2. There is a cat the rug. 3. There is a pair of shoes the sofa. 4. There are some flowers the curtains. 5. There is a man the cooker. 6. There is a door the cupboard. 7. There is a blue coat a red and a green coat in the wardrobe. 8. There is a picture the bed. IV. Look at the picture. Write the number next to the correct word. wardrobe fridge sink radiator bed cooker cupboard sofa table armchair carpet curtain chair beside table rug lamp V. Circle the correct answer. 1. Here is/ There are two English girls in my school. 2. Is there/Are there a good film on tonight? 3. There isn't/ There aren't a hall in my house. 4. There is/ There are a lot of chairs in the classroom. 5. Is there/ Are there blue curtains in your room? T 6. There isn't/ There aren't a lot of people in the cinema. VI. Look at the house then close your book and say what is in each room. VII. Complete the sentences with There is or There are. 1. a desk in my room. 2. green curtains in his room. 3. a sandwich on the table. 4. a book on the floor. 5. six children in the room. 6. nice posters in our classroom. 7. a cat on my bed. 8. thirty-six children in my class. VIII. Complete the table. Positive Negative Questions Positive Negative (1) a nice big wardrobe There isn’t a wardrobe (3) a bookshelf? Yes, (5) No, there isn't (2) blue curtains There aren't any curtains (4) any good posters? Yes, there are No, there aren't. IX. Complete the sentences with the correct form of there is or there are. 1. “ a TV in your room?” - “No, .” 2. “ a car in the garage?” - “Yes, .” 3. “ two beds in your room?” - “No, .” 4. “ a sofa in your living room?” - “Yes, .” 5. “ a lot of books in your bedroom?” - “Yes, .” 6. “ a hall in your house?” - Yes, .” 7. “ a lot of sandwiches in the kitchen?” - “No, .” 8. “ a lot of tables and chairs in your classroom?” - “Yes, .” X. Tick the correct sentences and correct the wrong ones. 1. There are three black dogs in the park.  2. Da Lat is a city beautiful.  3. There is two good actors in the film.  4. Are there two new DVDs in your bag?  5. There is six books on my desk.  XI. Write the conversations using the words below. Example: a new pencil case in your bag/ old. A: Is there a new pencil case in your bag? B: No, there isn't. There's an old pencil case. 1. five DVDs on the tabled/ three. A: B: 2. a man in the garden/ a woman. A: B: 3. six books in that bag/ seven. A. B. 4. lots of cars in the street/ one car. A: B: 5. thirty children in your class/ thirty-five A: B: XII. Reorder the words and write the sentences. 1. TV/ big/ a/ there's. 2. city/ beautiful/ a/ Ha Noi/ is. 3. student/ Mai/ new/ a/ is. 4. good/ a/ he/ friend/ is. 5. dog/ it's/ friendly/ a. 6. ten/ are/ desks/ small/ there. 7. new/ four/ there/ cars/ are. 8. green fields/ are/ there. 9. are/ two/ pizzas/ there/ big. 10. DVD player/ is/ new/ a/ there. XIII. Complete the text with the correct prepositions. We have English lessons (1) Room 18. There are 24 tables for students and one desk for the teacher. (2) the walls, there are lots of posters of England. There’s a cupboard at the front of the room and (3) the cupboard, there's a TV and DVD player. Sometimes we watch films. There are some bookshelves (4) the classroom. (5) the shelves, there are a lot of English books. Our books are (6) the teacher's desk. He wants to look at our homework. Our school bags are (7) the floor, and there is some food (8) the school bags. It's now 5.30 pm. We are (9) home, but our teacher is (10) school. He often stays late to prepare for tomorrow's lesson. C. SPEAKING I. Reorder the phrases to a make a conversation. And have you got posters in your room? Yeah, he’s great. He has air hair and green eyes – wonderful! Theo Walcott is in it! One or two. My favourite is an old Arsenal poster. 1 Do you have any posters on your bedroom? Oh? Why? Yes, I do. Lots. My favourite is the poster of Brad Pitt. II. Complete the conversation with the verbs below and then practice it with your classmates. Conversation 1 Martin What are you doing on Saturday, Susan? Susan Nothing much. I'm (1) some old DVDs Martin Aren't you going to the cinema? Susan No, there's nothing new. What are you doing? Martin I'm (2) into the city centre with some friends. . Susan Sounds good. Can I come? Martin Sure! Good idea! Conversation 2 Pil What are you (3) this evening? Laura I'm (4) my essay for English. Phil Really? Laura Why don't you do your essay too? We could help each other. Pil I'm sorry, I can't. I'm (5) my dad with his new computer D. READING I. Complete the emails with there’s, there are, there’s no, and there are no. From Kristen Hi Gina, Here's a picture of my city - Sydney, Australia. (1) many interesting place here. Sydney has a lot of beaches. My favourite beach is Bondi Beach. (2) a great zoo, too: Taronga Zoo. (3) a small downtown. It's the Pitt Street Mall. (4) four nice cafés and a great music store at the mall. Sydney Opera House is famous. It's a great city. I love it. Come and visit me soon! Kristen From Gina Dear Kristen, Thanks for your e-mail. Sydney is beautiful. My town is very small. (5) opera house here. (6) beaches here. (7) a small. (8) two restaurants and an Internet café. My town is a little boring, but I like it a lot. Bye Gina II. Read the email, match the sentences halves below, and write the answer in each blank. Hello Andrew, There is picture of my new bedroom. It’s not very big. There’s a bed, a desk, and a chair. There are two window. The curtains are new. On the desk there is a computer and a photo of my dog, Blackie. There are six posters in my room. There are animals on all the posters. The posters are beautiful. Best wishes Daniel 1. In Daniel's room a. Daniels’ desk. 2. Daniel’s room b. there’s a bed, a desk and a chair. 3. There are two windows with new c. a dog 4. There’s a computer on d. is not very big. 5. Daniel’s pet is e. lots of animals. 6. The dog’s name f. in Daniels’ room. 7. There are posters g. is Blackie 8. On the posters there are h. curtains III. Read the conversation between four students: Linda, Kate, Steve and Jack. Then answer Yes or No to the questions. Linda: What's your new bedroom like, Kate? Kate: It's not very big. But it's really nice! Steve: Are there any good posters? Kate: Yes, a Coldplay poster and … Jack: Coldplay? Who are they? Steve: Oh, come on, Jack! They're really famous! Kate: And there is a nice big wardrobe, too. Jack: Is there a bookshelf? Kate: Yes, there is. It's next to the bed. It's small, but there aren't a lot of books in my room! Linda: Is there a light for reading in bed? Kate: No, there isn't. Steve: What else is there? Kate: Well, there are blue curtains, two blue chairs and a desk. On the desk there's a … Jack: Computer? Kate: Yes, and there is a DVD player in it! Linda: Great! Can we watch some DVDs at your place? Kate: Sure. Let's get Steve's Coldplay DVDs! Steve: OK! Notes - curtain (n) = màn cửa. - at your place = nơi ở, nhà của bạn 1. Is Kate's new bedroom big? 2. Are Coldplay famous? 3. Is Kate's bookshelf big? 4. Are her curtains green? 5. Is there a Coldplay poster in her room? 6. Is there a wardrobe in her room? 7. Are there a lot of books in her room? 8. Is there a DvD player in her computer? IV. Read the article about unusual houses, and then answer the questions. A house? A boat? A houseboat! Pete and Karen Clay are from Kentucky. They have an unusual home. It's a houseboat named Fargo. Their houseboat has a living room, a dining room, a kitchen, and a bathroom, and three bedrooms. The Clay's children, Andy and Kris, love it. "It's a cool house and a fun boat,” says Kris. Up in a tree! Grant Stone is 12, and his sister, Jenna, 8. They're only kids, but they have a house. It’s a tree house! It's in the country. It’s at their grandparents' house in Kansas. Their tree house has one room. It's a living room with a table and a few chairs. It's small, but Grant and Jenna think it's great. Grant says, "It's my favourite place! That's the name - My Place.” Read the article again. Then complete the chart. Name Kind of house Name of home Number of rooms The Clays The Stones Are these sentences true (T), or false (F)? 1. The Clay's houseboat has two bedrooms. 2. The Clay's houseboat is small. 3. Grant is 12 years old. 4. Grant has two sisters. 5. The tree house is big. V. Read the texts and translate them into Vietnamese. Strangest Houses in the World Dancing House Located in Czech Republic, the Dancing House was built between 1992 and 1996. It looks like a dancing couple, symbolizing the popular dancers Fred Astaire and Ginger Rogers. Ramot Polin Apartments The Ramot Polin Apartments in Ireland looks like hive of honeybees. There are 720 housing units in the apartments built around 1972-1975.

Cube Houses The Cube Houses in Rotterdam look like a bunch of cubes to form a roof of a base building. Each cube house represents a tree and together the houses form a grove, like a village within the city. There are three floors in this house. Enter the house from the entrance on the ground floor. Climb up the first floor to the living room and open kitchen. The second floor has two bedrooms and a bathroom. Some of these houses have a small garden on the top floor. E. WRITING I. Make sentences from the given words or phrases. 1. There/ a bed/ corner/ the room. 2. Shelves/ above/ the closet. 3. Wardrobe/ the center/ the room. 4. Table/ between/ two chairs. 5. Lamp/ next/ the bed. 6. Table/ the right/ the wardrobe. 7. There/ some pictures/ the wall. 8. There/ a window/ the left-side/ the room. 9. Bed/ opposite/ the door. 10. There/ some bottles/ the shelf. II. Write sentences about your living room, your kitchen and your bedroom. l. In the living room, there's a sofa, there are two 2. In the 3. In the III. Read Nadia's text about her messy desk. Write a similar text. My desk is really messy! My pen is in my dictionary. My pencil case is on my school bag, and my pencils are on the school bag, too. My English book is behind the computer, My ruler is in my English book. My cat is on the computer. Where is my red pen? No idea! Answer: IV. Read the description of Susan's ideal room. Describe your ideal room. In my ideal room, there's a big bed and there are yellow curtains. There are a lot of posters of pop stars and horses. There's a nice desk. On the desk, there's a computer with a big screen. There are two chairs, and there are lots of shelves for my books and DVDs. There is also a good stereo. Answer: In my ideal room there is..… There are.....   TEST (UNIT 2) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1. A. beds B. clocks C. walls D. tables 2. A. grandparents B. brothers C. uncles D. fathers 3. A. mothers B. centres C. aunts D. cousins 4. A. cities B. watches C. dishes D. houses 5. A. books B. rooms C. walls D. pillows 6. A. clocks B. villas C. tables D. chairs 7. A. bed B. television C. chest D. toilet 8. A. fridge B. light C. living D. picture 9. A. poster B. sofa C. own D. laptop 10. A. room B. book C. door D. look II. Find which word does not belong to each group. Then read the words aloud. 11. A. town house B. country house C. playground D. villa 12. A. living room B. attic C. apartment D. kitchen 13. A. dishwasher B. sofa C. sink D. cupboard 14. A. wardrobe B. microwave C. fridge D. cooker 15. A. bed B. lamp C. television D. sink III. Choose the correct answers. 16. There are a lot of things in Da Lat . A. see B. to see C. seeing D. to seeing 17. It is called the Tiger room there is a big tiger on the wall. A. because B. so C. but D. like 18. I live my parents and my younger sister in a town house Ha Noi. A. with - at B. at - at C. of - in D. with - in 19. We are moving a new house the city centre soon. A. to - in B. at - at C. to - from D. from - in 20. We live in a town house, but our grandparents live in a house. A. villa B. country C. apartment D. city 21. There are two lights the ceiling. A. at B. in C. on D. between 22. There is a family photo the wall. A. on B. at C. in D. next 23. There four chairs and a table the middle of the room. A. is - on B. is - in C. are - at D. are - in 24. We need some chairs the kitchen. A. with B. for C. at D. on 25. There are some dirty dishes the floor. A. in B. with C. on D. for 26. There aren't any pillows the bed. A. in B. on C. behind D. in front of 27. My bedroom is the bathroom. A. under B. on C. in D. next to 28. I’d study hard for the exam. A. better B. like C. be D. do 29. There are clothes on the floor – it’s . A. interesting B. mess C. messes D. messy 30. There a big fridge the corner. A. is - on B. is - in C. are - in D. are - on 31. There are many chairs in the kitchen, there is only one in my bedroom. A. so B. because C. but D. in 32. My bedroom is small but it has a window. A. big B. small C. interesting D. old 33. Where the living room? A. is B. are C. do D. does 34. Where the books? Are they the bookshelf? A. is - on B. is - in C. are - in D. are - on 35. there any furniture your new living room? A. Is - in B. Is - at C. Are - in D. Are - on IV. Fill the blanks with is, are, isn't, aren't, do, does, where. 36. In my house there four bedrooms. 37. Where you live, Nam? 38. We staying at my uncle's house in Da Lat. 39. How many rooms there in the hotel? 40. What Mrs. Brown need for the living room? 41. they have the right things for the kitchen? 42. There any furniture in my bedroom. I need many things. 43. There any chairs in the kitchen. We need four chairs. 44. does your aunt live? 45. Which house you want to live in - a town house or a country house? V. Complete each of the following sentences with the correct preposition. 46. The kitchen is to the bathroom. 47. We live a town house. 48. Is there a picture the wall? 49. There is a ceiling fan the bedroom. 50. My town house is the city centre. VI Rewrite the following sentences keeping the same meaning. 51. There are many chairs in the kitchen. The kitchen 52. Nam lives in the city. Nam doesn't 53. There are four people in my family: my parents, my brother and me. I live 54. The television is in front of the picture. The picture is 55. I don't watch TV in any other rooms but the living room. I only VII. Complete the conversation with the phrase below, and then practise it. Mary: (56) Kate: Well, it's not very big. Jack: (57) Kate: Yes, there is. It's small, but that's OK. Mary: Is there a light for reading in bed? Kate: (58) Steve: (59) Kate: Well, there are blue curtains and two chairs. There's a desk, and (60) VIII. Choose the best answer to complete the text. You can't see our house (61) here because it is (62) the church. When you walk up Prince Street, it is (63) the left, next (64) the Black Cat Café. My room is upstairs (65) the right. I have a desk (66) front (67) the window. And I like looking out because our house is (68) the park. My desk is (69) the bed (70) the wardrobe. 61. A. from B. behind C. on D. in 62. A. in B. behind C. on D. between 63. A. on B. at C. in D. under 64. A. in B. at C. on D. to 65. A. in B. behind C. on D. next 66. A. on B. at C. in D. next 67. A. about B. of C. on D. with 68. A. near B. on C. next D. from 69. A. on B. in C. between D. at 70. A. on B. and C. in D. behind IX. Read the email, and then decide whether the questions are true (T), false (F) or not mentioned (NM). Hi Marco, We are moving to our new flat on Saturday. The flat has only two bedrooms, and it has a small garden at the back. It's good for me because it's near my school and the city centre. When you come in the front door, there's a long hall with a bathroom at the other end. The door on the right goes into the kitchen with the dining room behind it. The next room is the living room. It's a comfortable, sunny room and from there you can walk straight out into the garden. After that there's my parents' bedroom, and finally you come to my bedroom. It's next to the bathroom. I'm writing this email on my computer at my desk under the window. All my furniture is in my room now and it looks good. Love Alice 71. The flat doesn't have a garden. 72. Alice walks to school. 73. The dining room is behind the kitchen. 74. Her parents' bedroom is next to the bathroom. 75. Her bedroom doesn't have a window. X. Make sentences using the words and phrases given. 76. Mai/ best friend/ school. 77. She/ love/ read/ write/ short stories. 78. We/ often/ homework/ together/ and/ she/ help/ me/ lot. 79. She/ know/ lot/ history/ and/ we/ chat/ it/ hours. 80. Tomorrow/ we/ watch/ new film/ Disney channel/ together.

  Unit 3: MY FRIENDS A. PHONETICS Underline the sound /b/ and /p/, and then read them aloud. brown, black, blue, blonde, big, book, board, bear, bean, butter, bread, breakfast, begin, become, bring, baseball, volleyball, badminton, basketball, bee, baby, bus, library, librarian, biking, bedroom, behind, between, but, blank, subject. people, person, peanut, pig, pizza, popcorn, picnic, picture, party, part, paper, sport, play, pretty, lip, parents, grandparents, pen, pencil, compass, cap, space, respect, shopping, help, happy, project, appropriate, stamp, experiment, computer. B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Who is it? Write the correct names of the people. Anita is short and has dark, curly hair. Marion is short and slim. Her hair is blonde and curly. Peter is tall and has short, straight hair. Paul is tall and slim. He wears glasses and his hair is long Alison has blonde, curly hair and she is tall. Roger is short and slim and his hair is black. Frederick is tall and wears glasses. He is quite old. Barbara is a bit fat, and her hair is black, long and curly. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. II. Rewrite the sentences, using have or has face. Example: Her face is round.  She has a round face. 1. My hair is black. 2. Mrs. Huyen's eyes are round and black. 3. His eyes are blue. 4. Her cheeks are chubby. 5. Miss Huong's face is round. 6. Miss Thanh's legs are long. III. Fill in each blank with the correct verb. 1. She an oval face. 2. Mai's hair long or short? - It short. 3. Mai short black hair. 4. He tall and thin. 5. Tan an athlete. He very strong. 6. What those? 7. What color those bikes? 8. What color Nam's eyes? IV. Fill in the blanks with the missing words: is, has, or wear(s). And translate the passage into Vietnamese. Kevin (l) short and slim. He (2) glasses and he (3) blue eyes. His hair (4) brown and curly. Tom (5) short and slim. He (6) glasses and he (7) green eyes. His hair (8) long, brown, and wavy. Paul (9) tall. He doesn't (10) glasses. He (11) brown eyes, and his hair (12) brown and curly. Ben (13) short. He (14) brown eyes and his hair (15) long, black and straight. V. Match the halves of each sentence, and write the answer in each blank. Answer A B 1. We're leaving a. homework this afternoon, but then I'm free. 2. Are you cleaning your b. room this evening? 3. Jenny's coming to c. to the cinema with Tom tomorrow evening. 4. Martin is going d. my party on Saturday! 5. I'm doing my e. for London next Sunday. VI. Fill in each blank with the correct adjective from the box. 1. It is to sit on the plane with nothing to read. 2. I'm not very at Maths. I often make mistakes in calculations. 3. Everyone is to me. They often help me when I need. 4. She is often at school, and she always gets good marks. 5. The teacher wants the students to feel about asking questions when they don't understand. 6. She always has a smile with everyone. 7. Children are often of people they don't know. 8. He's a little bit ; he likes to talk a lot. 9. It's a really film; everyone laughs a lot. 10. She's very - she writes poetry and paints. VII. Rewrite the sentences in the negative form. l. They are coming to London on Monday. 2. He is finishing work tomorrow. 3. She is spending her next holiday at home. 4. He's leaving for Ha Noi tomorrow. 5. We are going out tonight. VIII. Put the words into the correct order to form the questions, and then write short answers. 1. you/ are/ dinner/ to/ coming/ - no. Are you coming to dinner? - No, I'm not. 2. playing/ the/ are/ next/ you/ game/ in/ - no. 3. they/ tomorrow/ driving/ to/ London/ are - yes. 4. going/ evening/ to/ is/ cinema/ she/ the/ tomorrow - yes. 5. at/ they/ home/ evening/ this/ are/ eating - no. IX. Match the questions and answers, and write the answers in the blanks. 1. What are you doing on Sunday? a. Jenny - she's visiting her mum. 2. Are you helping John tomorrow? b. At the station, I think. 3. What's Sarah doing tomorrow? c. No, we aren't playing any more matches this month. 4. Where's John meeting us? d. No, certainly not. He never helps me. 5. Who isn't coming to the party tomorrow? e. I'm working until lunchtime. 6. Are you playing football next Monday? f. She's playing in the basketball tournament. X. Complete the text. Use the present simple. My best friend My best friend is Hannah. She (1. live) next door to me. We (2. go) to the same school but we are in different classes. I (3. walk) to school but Hannah (4. go) by bike, because she always (5. get up) late. After school we (6. finish) our homework first, then we (7. listen) to our favourite music. I (8. like) R&B, but Hannah (9. hate) it. She (10. think) it’s boring. She (11. love) rock music. XI. Complete the conversation with the correct form of the verbs in brackets in the present continuous. Jack: I'm bored. Nick: Why don't you find something to do? Jack: What can I do? Nick: There are lots of things you can do. This is what I (1. do) this weekend. On Friday evening I (2. meet) Jane. We (3. go) to the cinema. Then in Saturday, Tom and I (4. play) table-tennis. Then we (5. have) lunch with Sam. After lunch, Tom and Sam (6. start) their new judo classes. I (7. not go) with them because my dad (8. take) me to a basketball match. It's my mum's birthday on Sunday. She (9. not have) a big party. We (10. have) lunch at a nice restaurant near our house. Jack: Wow. You are busy. Can I come with you to the cinema on Friday? Nick: Of course, you can, Jack. XII. Use the cues to make questions and answers about the conversation, and then match them together. Number 1 has been done for you as an example. a 1. Who/ Nick/ meet/ on Friday? a. He/ meet/ Jane. Who is Nick meeting on Friday? He is meting Jane. 2. Where/ they/ go? b. He/ take/ him/ to a basketball match. 3. What sport/ Nick and Jane/ play? c. No/ he/ not. 4. When/ they/ play? d. They/ go/ to the cinema. 5. Who/ they/ meet/ for lunch? e. They/ play/ on Saturday morning. 6. Nick/ do/ yoga/ with Tom and Jack? f. They/ have lunch/ at a nice restaurant. 7. Where/ his dad/ take him? g. No/ she/ not. 8. Nick's mum/ have/ a big birthday party? h. They/ meet/ Sam. 9. Where/ they/ have/ lunch? i. They/ play/ tennis. C. SPEAKING I. Rearrange the phrases to make a conversation. Conversation 1  Christina I'm spending the evening at school.  Michelle Really? A long evening.  Christina Yeah, we're having a video evening with our language teachers.  Michelle At school?  Christina Yeah, until midnight.  Michelle Cool. Can I come too? 1 Michelle What are you doing tomorrow evening, Christina? Conversation 2  Oliver OK. See you on Monday then! 1 Tim What are you doing this weekend?  Oliver Oh, they're fun! There's a lot of great rides.  Tim No, thanks. I don't really like theme parks.  Oliver I'm going to Luna Park with some friends. Would you like to come?  Tim Anyway, I'm going to the youth club on Saturday, then I'm going to football match on Sunday. II. Complete the conversation with the phrases below. Kevin What are your plans for the weekend? Dan Well, (1) DVDs tomorrow night. Do you want to watch them with me? Kevin (2) , but I can't. Dan Oh, why not? Kevin (3) Jenny. She's having a party! Dan What? (4) ! III. Read the and tick () the things you are doing. Then make questions to ask your partner to complete the right column. Me My partner meet friends tomorrow   stay at home on Sunday   play badminton tomorrow   do homework on Saturday   go to the party at the weekend   do homework this evening   cook dinner tomorrow   have a campfire next month   play traditional games at the weekend   Example: "Are you meeting friends tomorrow? No, I'm not. I'm visiting my grandparents. What about you? IV. Complete the following conversation. Lan Is (l) your sister (2) there? Hanh Yes, that's my sister. Lan (3) ? Hanh No, (4) . She's tall. Lan (5) or (6) ? Hanh Her hair is long. Lan (7) her eyes? Hanh They are brown. Lan (8) ? Hanh Yes, she has chubby cheeks. D. READING I. Read the passage, and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). Lan is a student in grade 6. She is tall and thin. She is light but she is not weak. She has oval face and chubby cheeks. Her hair is long and black. Her nose isn't big. It's small. She has brown eyes and white teeth. She's very nice. l. Lan has long black hair. 2. She is thin and weak. 3. Her cheeks are chubby. 4. Her nose is big. 5. Her eyes are black. 6. She has white teeth. II. Read the texts and decide if the sentences below are T (True) or F (False). Farrah (Turkey) Hi, my name’s Farrah. I'm twelve and I have two sisters and two brothers. I live in a village about 50 kilometers from Istanbul. My favourite food is pizza. I like computer games and nature programmes. I also play football and I swim a lot. I don't have a pet because my mum doesn't like animals. Claire (Scotland) Hi, my name's Claire. I live in Dundee in Scotland. I have one brother. He's 21 and he works in Edinburgh. My favourite food is chicken. And I also like chocolate a lot. My friend Monica and I often go to the park and in the evenings we watch TV together. We like sitcoms best. I also like reading (Monica doesn't, she doesn't even want to read the Harry Potter books) and horse riding. I have two pets: a cat and a dog. Maria (Poland) Hi, my name's Maria. I live in Krakow and I have two little brother. I'm thirteen and my brothers are five and eight. My favourite food is fish, but we don't often eat it. I play handball in our school team and I'm also in the swimming team. I love going to the cinema. A lot of films are in English. That's good for me. I can listen to English a lot. I buy magazines with my pocket money. I don't have a pet. Sean (Ireland) Hi, I'm Sean. I'm from Sligo in Ireland. I live on a farm and I really like animals. We have lots of animals, but I don't have a real pet. We have six horses and I really like horse riding. My friends and I also play football and computer games. My dad gives me some pocket money for that. True False 1. Farrah has two sisters and a brother.   2. Farrah lives in Istanbul.   3. Farrah's favourite food is pizza.   4. Clare's favourite food is chicken.   5. Clare loves sitcoms.   6. Clare has one pet.   7. Maria plays handball and basketball.   8. Maria loves going to the cinema.   9. Maria doesn't have a pet.   10. Sean lives on a farm.   11. Sean doesn't get pocket money.   12. Sean doesn't play computer games.   Notes: pet (n) = thú cưng handball (n) = môn bóng ném III. Culture World: USA A. Which summer Camp Is For you? Which summer camp would you like to go to? Why? Millions of North American children and teenagers go to summer camps every year. At traditional camps the 'campers' do outdoor activities, for example, swimming, riding horses, or water-skiing. Many camps specialize in one activity - you can learn about ecology, music, science, and many more things. Check out our selection of camps. Mountain adventure Walk and climb in the beautiful North Cascades (Washington State), then camp under the stars next to a lake. You learn about plants and animals and how to survive in the mountains, Calling all artists! Be an artist at our Arts Centre for students aged 13-18. We have courses in art, dance, music and theatre. Our students have lots of fun and our teachers are excellent. Circus camp Would you like to be in a circus? We have classes for beginners and advanced students. More than 500 young people come every year and have a fantastic time with us. This year you can come too! Whale camp Come to Grand Manan Island (between USA and Canada) and watch whales. Go round the island in a kayak and take photos of other sea animals and birds. Learn about ecology with marine biologists. Fashion design Are you the next Louis Vuitton or Giorgio Armani? Design and make your own clothes, then wear them at the fashion show. Space camp Meet NASA scientists and astronauts. Learn how to walk in space. See the stars in the summer sky. Design and build your own rocket. B. Read the magazine page quickly. March the summer camps with the activities. 1. painting: 2. animals: 3. making clothes: 4. walking in the country: 5. sciences: 6. acrobats: C. Are the sentences true (T) or false (F). True False l. A lot of US and Canadian children and teenagers go to summer camps.   2. Campers can do more than one activity at some summer camps.   3. At the Mountain adventure camp you can sleep outside.   4. There isn't a camp for people who like dancing.   5. You can go on a boat at the Whale camp.   6. At the Space camp you can go up into space in a rocket.   D. The project. Work in a group. Find out about activities you can do in different places in our country in the summer. Take Da Lat as an example. Name of place Name of activity Information Da Lat hiking and climbing Many pine forest, waterfalls. sightseeing Many kinds of flowers all year round. Visit ethnic villages. IV. READ FOR FUN: Teenage web designer Mike Sutton, from Sydney Australia, is a webmaster and he has his own company. The company is called "Whaam! Web Creations." And he's 15 years old. He's in 10th grade at school. We asked him some questions. Here are some emails between him and us. Question: Is it easy for a 15-year-old to do this work? Answer: Easy? I'm not sure - but it's exciting. I'm in the big world of business and I'm only 15. I do a lot of my work on the phone, so many people don't know that I'm only 15. And they don't ask me - so my age is not really a problem. Question: How do you learn the things you need to know? Answer: Experience! It's the best way to learn things, I think. Sometimes I have a problem and I look at other pages on the Web to find answers. I have friends, too. Sometimes, they can help me. Question: What is the importance of the Internet for people? Answer: I don't think it is very important, really. It's wonderful, of course - it's so easy to get information. But I don't think it is a very important thing in the world. Question: Do you do your own programming and design? Answer: Often, yes. It's fun and hard-working. But I also have some people doing the work for me. They're all very creative people. E. WRITING I. Write questions and short answers. Example: you/ play football/ this afternoon - yes. A: Are you playing football this afternoon? B: Yes, I am. 1. she/ cook a meal/ for lunch - no 2. they/ have a holiday/ in August - no 3. you/ play computer games/ tonight - yes. 4. he/ draw pictures about Hoi An/ tomorrow - no. 5. we/ have a campfire/ the weekend - yes. II. Read the diary and write what Sarah is doing each evening. Monday go to volleyball practice Tuesday work on Biology project for school with Tom Wednesday do a writing course Thursday buy Tom's present Friday meet Monica Saturday go to Tom's party! On Monday evening, she's going to the volleyball practice. III. Questionnaire & Interview. A. Write the questions to ask people you know about their future plans. 1. What/ do/ this evening? 2. What/ have/ for dinner this evening? 3. Where/ go/ on holiday/ this year? 4. How/ go/ to school/ tomorrow? 5. What/ do/ at the weekend? B. Then write the name of the person and their answer below. Name Answers TEST (UNIT 3) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1. A. kind B. confident C. nice D. like 2. A. request B. project C. neck D. exciting 3. A. foot B. book C. food D. look 4. A. finger B. leg C. neck D. elbow 5. A. creative B. think C. idea D. big II. Choose the correct answers. 6. Can you me the apple, please? A. move B. pass C. have D. turn 7. Mai is the phone, chatting friends. A. on - to B. on - on C. to - with D. to – to 8. She is always at school, and helps other students with their homework. A. hard B. hardly C. hard-working D. work hard 9. Diana is in the art club. She likes painting pictures, and everyone enjoys them. She is very . A. shy B. kind C. funny D. creative 10. The film is very , and we can't see all of it. A. exciting B. boring C. wonderful D. easy 11. Our class is going to a picnic at the zoo on Saturday. Would you like to come with us? A. have B. take C. pass D. go 12. It's to go home. It's so late. A. now B. sure C. time D. like 13. Please turn the lights. The room is so dark. A. with B. at C. in D. on 14. Can you the tables and chairs the next room? There are some more students. A. move - to B. take - in C. move - in D. take - on 15. Daisy is very to take the test. She is a very good student. A. kind B. confident C. friendly D. talkative 16. I like reading "Muc Tim" very much. It's my magazine. A. nice B. quick C. funny D. favourite 17. My close friend, Mai, has a face and hair. A. big - black B. small - short C. round - black D. short - long 18. My best friend is kind and . He often makes me laugh. A. funny B. nice C. shy D. boring 19. My brother has short hair. A. a - straight B. ∅ - long C. ∅ - curly D. a - black 20. On Sunday Nam his parents in the field as usual. A. helps B. help C. is helping D. helping 21. On Saturday Tom's parents him London to see the new film. A. are taking - to B. taking - to C. are going - to D. are going - in 22. Next summer I am working as a teacher in a village near Hoa Binh City. A. good B. nice C. favourite D. volunteer 23. The Summer Camp is for students between 10 and 15. A. age B. aged C. aging D. ages 24. We are visiting a milk farm to see they milk, cheese, and butter. A. why - do B. ∅ - do C. how - make D. how - do 25. Linda has hair an big eyes. A. blonde - small B. a black - blue C. blonde - blue D. black - long III. Read the text about Alice and correct the sentences. This is Alice. She's English and she's from London. She's thirteen years old. She has fair hair and brown eyes. She has a small nose. Her favourite colours are red, white and blue. 26. Alice is French. 27. She's from Manchester. 28. She's 14. 29. She has black hair and brown eyes. 30. Her favourite colours are red, white and yellow. IV. Complete each of the following sentences with ONE suitable word. 31. During the Summer Camp, we are doing a treasure in the field. 32. We are singing at the school's club: it's so exciting. 33. We are a Maths test on Friday. 34. I'd like to become an MC, so I am taking a speaking class at the Youth Cultural Centre. 35. If you are born under the of Sagittarius, you are independent, freedom-loving, and confident. 36. In our Biology field , we are visiting a milk farm and we are talking with the workers. 37. It's very to listen to a ghost story at midnight. 38. Peter often plays badminton with his friends. He also swims in his free time. He's very . 39. They are going to the library to find information. They are preparing their project. 40. Anita is a volunteer teacher at the village. She's responsible for a class. She gives instructions about different Indian dishes. V. Match the statement/ question in column A with the response in column B to have short exchanges, and write the answer in each blank. Answer A B 41. What colour of the eyes does Paul have? 42. Would you like to have a picnic on Sunday? 43. What sort of hair does she have? 44. Can you pass the pen, please?

45. Who's she? 46. Does she have a round face? 47. What does your new friend look like? 48. What are you doing tomorrow? 49. Who is it? 50. What do you see in the photo? a. It's curly.

b. Yes, sure.

c. She has a round face and short black hair. d. The students from your class are playing beach volleyball. e. It's my cousin, Jane. f. Of course not. She has an oval face. g. It's Minh, my best friend. He's kind and clever. h. We're taking part in an art workshop. i. Sorry, we can't. We're visiting our grandparents. j. They're blue. VI. Make sentences using the words and phrases given. 51. We/ visit/ milk farm/ do/ treasure hunt/ field/ tomorrow. 52. He/ play/ basketball/ have/ barbecued/ his friends/ Sunday evening. 53. You/ do/ anything/ this Saturday evening? 54. Our teacher/ ask/ us/ write/ emails/ English. 55. He/ play/ basketball/ very well/ and/ he/ sporty. VII. Write questions for the underlined part. 56. They are visiting a milk farm on Saturday. 57. I'm going to the judo club with my brother. 58. I'm not going to your party because I visit my grandparents. 59. We're working on our school project. 60. She understands things very quickly and easily. VIII. Find and correct the mistake in each sentence. 61. He isn't very tall so he is kind and friendly. 62. I'm playing football on my team. 63. We are going to Han River to watch the international firework competition, but you can watch it live on TV. 64. She works as a volunteer teacher to a village and everyone loves her. 65. I'm going to the river with my parents watching the firework display. IX. Complete the conversation, and then practise it with your partner. Linda Where's Tom? Peter (66) in the sport centre. Linda The sport centre? I think he is at the judo club. Do you think so? Peter (67) . And Tom's very good at judo. Linda Do you have a new classmate this morning? Peter Yes, (68) a round face and long black hair. Her name's Susan. Linda Would you introduce her to me? Peter Yes, (69) . I think she's very (70) because she paints nice pictures. X. Complete the text with the words in the box. Vicky Gates is a professional football player. She has (71) , (72) hair and blues eyes. She has long legs and very strong (73) . Vicky is American. Anita Mather is a professional sportswoman. She (74) basketball. She has very long (75) and (76) very tall. Joana Smith is an international (77) . She has short, fair hair and green eyes. She's short but she has very big shoulders. She's (78) . Jo Kelly is an (79) . She has long, dark hair and blue (80) . She has very long legs. Jo is from Nigeria.

  TEST YOURSELF 1 I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1. A. project B. leg C. evening D. neck 2. A. judo B. elbow C. nose D. blond 3. A. gets B. brings C. takes D. stops 4. A. mouth B. house C. country D. about 5. A. with B. mouth C. thanks D. three II. Put the plural nouns from the box into the correct column based on the pronunciation of the final s/es. III. Find which word does not belong in each group. Then read the words aloud. 1. A. fridge B. cooker C. microwave D. sofa 2. A. family B. teacher C. engineer D. doctor 3. A. his B. her C. you D. your 4. A. classrooms B. students C. teachers D. streets 5. A. television B. Internet C. telephone D. city 6. A. father B. mother C. brother D. student 7. A. Hello B. Hi C. Good night D. Good afternoon 8. A. Bye B. Goodbye C. Good night D. Good afternoon 9. A. chair B. apartment C. villa D. house 10. A. confident B. sport C. hard-working D. creative IV. Write the school things. 1. s _ a _ _ e _ e r 2. r _ _ _ _ 3. _ _ m _ _ _ s 4. _ i _ _ _ l e 5. n _ _ e _ _ _ _ 6. d _ _ _ 7. _ _ _ c _ _ _ _ _ r 8. t _ _ _ _ o _ _ V. Complete the sentences with the words given in the box. 1. When we we sleep in a tent. 2. Do you want to and dance? 3. Can he with his new camera? 4. It's hot! I want to in the sea. 5. Would you like to ? The chocolate ones are good. 6. You can a treasure hunt at our summer camp. 7. I sometimes like table tennis. 8. You can at the shop in the town. VI. Underline the correct words. 1. In the morning I get up/ go to bed at 6 am. 2. At 6.30 I have lunch/ breakfast with Mum and Dad. 3. I go to/ finish school at 6.45. 4. After school, I make/ do my homework. 5. Sometimes I play/ have computer games or go online. 6. I often listen to/ watch music in the evening. 7. On Saturday, I have/ go out with my friends. VII. Tick the correct sentences and correct the wrong ones. 1. There are three black dogs in the park.  2. Ha Noi is a city beautiful.  3. There is two good actors in the film.  4. Are there two new DVDs in your bag?  5. There is six books under my desk.  VIII. Match the sentences (1-7) with the school subjects (A-G). Answer Sentences Subjects 1. "London is the capital of England." A. Music 2. "Turn on your computers and go online." B. Science 3. "How do you spell 'umbrella'?" C. Geography 4. This song is beautiful. Listen to.... D. ICT 5. "In the year 1945, President Ho Chi Minh..." E. PE 6. Water is H20. That's hydrogen…" F. History 7. "Are you ready? Everybody runs…" G. English IX. Complete the sentences with the verbs in the present simple. start not watch have not have speak not do 1. You a nice dog. 2. I any brothers or sisters, but I have five cousins. 3. We TV in the summer, but we play games in the park. 4. homework on Sunday evenings. 6. We Vietnamese. 7. They school at 7 o'clock. X. Underline the correct words. 1. My brother walk/ walks to school with his friends. 2. Sue don't/doesn't like football. 3. Do/ Does he speak French? 4. Our teacher give/ gives us homework every day. 5. She go/ goes to school in London. 6. My mum and dad don't/ doesn't work on Saturdays. 7. There is/ are two English girls in my school. 8. Is/ Are there a good film on tonight? 9. There is/ are a lot of chairs in the classroom. 10. Is/ Are there chairs in your room? XI. Arrange the words to make correct sentences. 1. books/ are/ on/ there/ bookshelf/ many/ the. 2. many/ there/ how/ in/ are/ books/ school bag/ your? 3. television/ the/ there/ a/ living room/ in/ is. 4. forty-five/ class/ students/ there/ my/ are/ in. 5. living room/ tables/ in/ there/ the/ are/ two. 6. many/ there/ in/ how/ are/ the/ doors/ classroom? XII. Complete the questions with the verbs in the present simple. 1. When they (finish) school? 2. What subjects you (study) ? 3. What sports they (do) at school? 4. you (like) Maths? 5. Where they (live) ? 5. Who you (sit) next to at school? XIII. Read the letter from George. Choose the correct answer: A, B or C. Dear Sergio, How (l) you? (2) you want to know about a typical day at my school? I always (3) to school with my brother and my friend Steve. School starts at 7 o'clock. (4) the morning, we have five lessons, usually different subject. Then we have lunch. I (5) have lunch at school, often I go home. In the afternoon, there (6) two lessons. My favourite subject is Geography. After school, we often play football. What about you? Bye for now, George 1. A. do B. go C. are 2. A. Does B. Do C. Are 3. A. walk B. walks C. walking 4. A. On B. In C. At 5. A. don’t B. not C. doesn’t 6. A. have B. is C. are XIV. Underline the correct words. 1. This week, he is learning/ learns how to speak in public. 2. In the summer, I am swimming/ swim at the swimming pool. 3. What is she doing/ does she do at the moment? 4. I can't talk now. I am having/ have dinner. 5. Are you watching/ Do you watch TV right now? 6. We are staying/ stay at the beach every summer. XV. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B. Answer A B 1. What are those? 2. Where's your house? 3. Where does he live? 4. What time does she get up? 5. When do classes start? 6. How does she go to work? 7. Does she live in town? 8. Is it noisy in town? 9. Does Nam walk to school? 10. Are there any stores opposite your house? a. He lives in town. b. By motorbike. c. No, she lives in the country. d. It's on Nguyen Trai Street. e. Yes, there are. h. At six in the morning. g. They're video game rooms. h. Yes, it is. i. No, he goes to school by bike. j. At 7 in the morning. XVI. Complete the six conversations. Choose the correct answers: A, B, or C; and then practice these conversations with your partner. 1. What are you doing? A. I often watch TV. B. I'm doing my homework. C. I like listening to music. 2. I enjoy playing tennis. A. I don't like reading. B. Where do you play? C. I like listening to music. 3. It's sunny today. A. I like camping. B. How much is the ticket? C. Yes. Do you want to go to the beach? 4. I love football. A. What's your favourite team? B. Do you like football? C. I'm watching the match. 5. Can you pick up the ball, please? A. I play football on Tuesdays. B. Yes, of course I do. C. Yes, here you are. 6. He speaks English very well. A. Can you speak more slowly, please? B. I don't understand the question. C. Yes. His mother's American. XVII. Match the questions and answers, and write the in each blank. Then answer practise the short exchanges. Answer A B 1. What are you reading? a. No, they're my old jeans 2. How many books do you read a month? b. About two or three hours. 3. Are you wearing your new jeans? c. Yes, most of the time. 4. Do you often wear jeans? d. It's a film about London. 5. How many hours a day do you watch TV? e. No, that's his sister. 6. What are you watching at the moment? f. The Lord of the Rings. 7. Is Ben playing the piano? g. Yes, she always plays from 4 until 5. 8. Does she usually play in the afternoon? h. One or two. XVIII. Reorder the conversation. I'm nervous. Hi, Mary. How are you? Because tomorrow is the Maths test. Really? What's the matter? I'm not very happy. Why are you nervous? XIX. Reorder the conversation, writing the answer in each blank, number 1 has been done for you. a. Oh, in the country? Is your house big? b. Yes, I do. I live in an apartment. c. I live in the country. d. Yes, I am. My name's Thoa. What's your name? e. No. My house is not big, but my house has four bedrooms, a living room, a kitchen and a bathroom. Do you live in town? f. Is it noisy in the city? 1 g. Hello. Are you a new student? h. My name's Hanh. Where do you live, Thoa? i. Yes, it's very noisy here. XX. There is ONE mistake in each sentence, find and correct it. 1. What time she start work? 2. Nam live in a house in the country. 3. Are there a flower garden behind the house? 4. There is the supermarket near my house. 5. How many floors does your school there have? 6. There is an temple old near our house. 7. How does Mr. Dong travels to work? 8. After dinner, she do her homework. 9. She goes to school by a bus. 10. These people live on the Nguyen Trai Street. XXI. Complete each sentence so that it means the same as the sentence above. 1. My sister goes to school on foot. My sister . 2. The garden is behind Lan's house. There is . 3. The bank is not far from the post office. The bank is . 4. There are many flowers in our garden. Our garden . 5. Ba lives in town. Ba doesn't . XXII. Rearrange the words to make correct sentences. 1. near/ house/ is/ your/ there/ post office/ a? 2. school/ go/ your/ do/ to/ how/ students/ country/ in? 3. go/ by/ to/ they/ bicycle/ school. 4. work/ to/ city/ your/ in/ how/ people/ do/ travel? 5. motorbike/ by/ people/ travel/ work/ to. 6. there/ post office/ front/ your school/ in/ is/ of/ a? 7. Hoa/ country/ her parents/ lives/ in/ with/ the. 8. There/ beautiful garden/ left/ Ba's house/ a/ to/ is/ the/ of.   Unit 4: NEIGHBOURHOOD A. PHONETICS I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. film B. city C. nice D. police 2. A. big B. wide C. quite D. exciting 3. A. cheap B. sleepy C. near D. peaceful 4. A. heavy B. sea C. team D. street 5. A. noisy B. expensive C. house D. post II. Put the word into the correct column according to the underlined part. B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Write the comparative for of these adjectives. 1. strong stronger than 2. crowded more crowded than 3. tall 4. noisy 5. pretty 6. happy 7. short 8. big 9. modern 10. friendly 11. good 12. bad II. Use the words and write comparison. Example: France/ Italy. (large) France is larger than Italy. 1. Scotland/ Athens. (cold) 2. Chinese/ English. (difficult) 3. Jennifer Lopez/ Madonna. (pretty) 4. Football/ volleyball. (good) 5. A novel/ a short story. (long) III. Write sentences, using the comparative of the adjectives. Example: I/ my brother/ thin. I am thinner than my brother. 1. This book/ that one/ good. 2. The weather here/ the weather in my hometown/ hot. 3. A mouse/ a cat/ small. 4. A radio/ a television/ cheap. 5. The sun/ the moon/ big. 6. A mountain/ a hill/ high. 7. A child/ a man/ young. 8. A lake/ a sea/ small. 9. Your hair/ my hair/ long. 10. French food/ English food/ good. IV. Complete the following sentences with the comparatives of the adjectives. l. This chair is than that chair. (comfortable) 2. Your flat is than mine. (large) 3. Love is than money. (important) 4. Iron is than wood. (heavy). 5. My Physics course is than my Math course. (difficult) 6. The Nile River is than the Mississippi. (long) 7. The dog is than a cow. (intelligent) 8. My mother's cooking is than my father's. (good) 9. My father's cooking is than my mother's. (bad) 10. This dress is than that one. (pretty) 11. A horse is than a man. (strong) 12. A rose is than a weed. (beautiful) V. Complete the sentences with the comparative form of the adjectives in brackets. l. Which river is , the Red River or the Mekong River? (long) 2. Which country is , China or Viet Nam? (big) 3. Which animals are , dogs or dolphins? (intelligent) 4. Which animals are , cats or horses? (fast) 5. Which is , water or oil? (heavy) 6. Which month in Viet Nam is , October or December? (cold) 7. Which language is , Chinese or English? (difficult) 8. Which city is , London or Rome? (old) 9. Which city is , New York or Paris? (big) 10. Which mountain is , Mount Everest or Mount Fuji? (high) VI. Write sentences using the words or phrases given. Example: Her new school/ big/ her old school. Her new school is bigger than her old school. l. My father/ old/ Uncle Hung. 2. She/ tall/ her mother. 3. Winter/ cold/ spring. 4. Ha Noi Opera House/ big/ Hai Phong Opera House. 5. A house in the city centre/ expensive/ a house in the suburb. 6. My neighbourhood/ crowded/ your neighbourhood. 7. Travelling by train/ comfortable/ travelling by coach. 8. Mai/ young/ her sisters. 9. Hue/ historic/ Hoi An. 10. Living in the country/ peaceful/ living in the city. VII. Complete the sentences with the correct forms of the adjectives in brackets. 1. Our theater is than our cinema. (big) 2. Museums are than art galleries. (interesting) 3. The market is than the shopping centre. (cheap) 4. The amusement park is than the swimming pool. (noisy) 5. The French restaurant in our town is than the Italian restaurant. (expensive) 6. Sundays are than Saturdays. (boring) 7. My mum is than my dad. (busy) 8. My new school is than my old school. (modern) VIII. Complete the second sentence with the correct form of the opposite adjective. 1. The museum is bigger than the art gallery. The art gallery the museum. 2. The sports centre is more expensive than the swimming pool. The swimming pool the sports centre. 3. The market is older than the shopping centre. The shopping centre the market. 4. The skate park is noisier than the amusing park. The amusing park the skate park. 5. The food here is worse than my cooking! My cooking the food here! 6. The kitchen is darker than the living room. The living room the kitchen. 7. I'm quieter than my brother. My brother I am. 8. My computer is newer than my mobile phone. My mobile phone my computer. IX. Use the information to make sentences about the Multi-screen Cinema and the Royal Cinema. Use the correct form of the adjectives given. 1. Drinks in the Multi-screen Cinema are drinks in the Multi-screen. 2. Drinks in the Royal Cinema drinks in the Multi-screen Cinema. 3. The Multi-screen Cinema the Royal Cinema. 4. The Royal Cinema the Multi-screen Cinema. 5. The seats in the Multi-screen Cinema the seats in the Royal Cinema. 6. The staff in the Royal Cinema the staff in the Multi-screen Cinema. 7. In my opinion, the Royal Cinema the Multi-screen Cinema. 8. In my opinion, the Multi-screen Cinema the Royal Cinema. C. SPEAKING I. Complete the following conversations. A Tourist: Excuse me. Can you (1) me the (2) to Ben Thanh Market? Hoa: Ben Thanh Market? Go straight (3) . (4) the second turning (5) the right. Ben Thanh Market is on your left. Tourist: Is there a post office near (6) ? Hoa: Oh, yes. It's opposite (7) market. Tourist: Thank you very much. Hoa: You're (8) . B Tourist: Excuse me. Is (1) a restaurant near here? Lan: Oh, yes. But it's not very near here. Turn right into Tran Phu Street. (2) the first turning (3) the left. You will be on Nguyen Trai Street. The restaurant is (4) the end of the street. Tourist: That's so far. Lan: (5) do you go there? Tourist: I walk. Lan: You should go (6) taxi. Tourist: Thank you. Bye. Lan: Not at all. Bye. II. Peter is at  on the map. Fill in the gaps with the words or phrases in the box. A Peter (1) . Where's the post office? Man (2) this road and turn right. (3) Green Road. The post office is (4) , (5) the chemist's. Peter Thank you very much. Man You're welcome. B Peter Excuse me. (6) a supermarket (7) ? Woman Yes, there is. Go along this road and (8) . The supermarket is (9) , (10) the bank. Peter Thanks a lot. III. Complete the following short conversations. Example: A: Life in the country is slower than the city life. (slow) B: Yes, it is. The city life is much faster. 1. A: The country is the city. (quiet) B: Yes, that's true. The city is much . 2. A: The streets of New York are the streets of Paris. (quiet) B: No, they aren't. They're much . 3. A: Paris is London. (big) B: B: No, it isn't. It's much . 4. A: The Underground in London is the Metro in Paris. (good) B: No, it isn't. The Underground is much . 5. A: The Ferrari is the Toyota. (fast) B: Yes, that's true. The Ferrari is . D. READING I. Read the following passage, and then answer the questions. London and Rome are the two old cities in Europe. Rome is older than London, it is about 800 years older than London. But London is bigger than Rome in area and population. In general, London is colder than Rome in winter and cooler than Rome in summer. Rome is wetter than London and nearer the sea than London. Notes: - area = diện tích - in general = nhìn chung - Europe = châu Âu l. Which city is older? 2. Which city is bigger in area and population? 3. Is London hotter than Rome? 4. Which city has got more rain? 5. Which city is nearer the sea? II. Read the conversations and write the letters of the correct building in the signs. You are at the cross () on the street. Conversation 1: Woman Excuse me, where's the post office? Man Go straight ahead as far as the shopping centre. Then turn left. On the corner, there's a large bank. The post office is next to the bank. T Woman Thank you. Man You're welcome. Conversation 2: Boy Excuse me. Can you tell me where the Odeon Cinema is? Woman The Odeon? Well, let me think. It's on Hill Road. Boy How do I get there? Woman Go straight on, take the first turning on the left and go past the police station. Then there's a small park in front of you. Go past the park and straight ahead and the cinema is next to the large music shop. Boy Thank you. Woman Not at all. Answers: : Post office. : Cinema III. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. I live in a small village called Northville. There are about 2000 people here. I love the village (1) it is very quiet and life is slow and easy. The village is always clean; people look (2) it with great care. The air is always clean, too. People are much friendlier here than in a city because everyone (3) the others, and if someone has a problem, there are always people who can help. There are only a few things that I don't like about Northville. One thing is that we have not got many things to do in the evening; we haven't got (4) cinemas or theaters. The other thing is that people always talk about (5) , and everyone knows what everyone is doing. But I still prefer village life to life in a big city. 1. A. so B. although C. because D. but 2. A. for B. at C. up D. after 3. A. knows B. know C. is knowing D. knew 4. A. little B. some C. any D. few 5. A. others B. other C. another D. one another IV. Read the passage, and then answer the questions. Lan goes to Nha Trang with her family on holiday now. She stays at a hotel on the side of the beach. In the early morning, she goes to the sea and swims for an hour. Then she has breakfast in a canteen on the beach to enjoy fresh air in the morning. In the afternoon, she takes some photos of the sights. She is staying in Nha Trang for four days and takes of a lot of nice photos. She is buying some postcards and souvenirs for her friends. It is an enjoyable holiday because she has a lot of fun. 1. Where does Lan go on holiday now? 2. What does she do in the early morning? 3. What does she do in the afternoon? 4. How long is she staying in Nha Trang? 5. Why is her holiday enjoyable? E. WRITING I. Rearrange the words and phrases to make meaningful sentences. 1. an/ pagoda/ village/ go/ old/ my/ has. 2. railway-station/ not/ small/ a/ that/ town/ has/ got. 3. one/ Mr. and Mrs. Brown/ only/ have/ car/ got. 4. building/ school/ new/ has got/ my/ a. 5. many/ got/ city/ lakes/ that/ has/ beautiful. 6. London/ parks/ has/ famous/ got/ many. 7. any/ city/ museums/ your/ has/ got? 8. art galleries/ not/ town/ has/ got/ this/ any. 9. buildings/ old/ got/ Hue/ pagodas/ and/ many/ has. 10. a/ house/ has/ got/ garage/ your? II. Rewrite the sentences using the words in brackets. Do not change the meaning of the sentences and do not change the form of the words given. Example: Tom is taller than Mary. (SHORT) Mary is shorter than Tom. 1. The Central Post Office is bigger than this District Post office. (SMALL) 2. The skyscraper is higher than our office building. (LOW) 3. My neighbourhood is noisier than your neighbourhood. (QUIET) 4. Alice is slimmer than Daisy. (FAT) 5. The Riverview Hotel is cheaper than the Palace Hotel. (EXPENSIVE) 6. A house in the city is more expensive than a house in the country. (CHEAP) 7. The air in the city is more polluted than the air in the country. (FRESH) 8. Life in the city is more interesting than life in a small village. (BORING) III. Write sentences about the city tour of Ha Noi, using the words and phrases given. l. Ha Noi/ capital of Viet Nam. It/ history/ more than 1,000 years. 2. First/ go/ President Ho Chi Minh's Mausoleum/ see/ stilt house/ where/ he lived/ 1958/ 1969. 3. Then/ go/ One-Pillar Pagoda. It/ a pagoda/ over the water/ middle/ a square lake. 4. After that/ have a chance/ visit/ Tran Quoc Pagoda/ on the shore/ West Lake. 5. Then/ have lunch/ restaurant/ the Old Quarter. 6. Finally/ go/ Hoan Kiem Lake/ heart/ soul/ Ha Noi.   TEST (UNIT 4) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. arrive B. quickly C. historic D. city 2. A. teens B. see C. coffee D. street 3. A. convenient B. evening C. exciting D. eve 4. A. expensive B. opposite C. those D. noisy 5. A. ideal B. cinema C. exciting D. difficult II. Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. 6. A. exciting B. boring C. interesting D. convenient 7. A. big B. tall C. wide D. expensive 8. A. suburb B. park C. memorial D. market 9. A. sunny B. beaches C. weather D. supermarket 10. A. cross B. turn C. straight D. buy III. Choose the correct answers. 11. Is there a theatre your neighbourhood? A. in B. on C. at D. with 12. the second turning the right. A. Take - in B. Take - on C. Get - in D. Get - on 13. . A. show - road B. show - street C. tell - road D. tell - way 14. The map that the art gallery is nearer than the cathedral. Shall we go there first? A. speaks B. asks C. says D. talks 15. A is a place where we go to buy stamps or send letters. A. library B. post office C. cinema D. school 16. The air in this area is with smoke from factories. A. polluted B. fresh C. noisy D. clean 17. There are many shops near here, so the streets are very busy and during the day. A. noise B. narrow C. quiet D. noisy 18. It is to live far from the market and the supermarket. A. easy B. inconvenient C. convenient D. comfortable 19. The people in Hoi An are incredibly and . A. friendly - help B. friendly - helpful C. friendship - helpless D. friend - helpfully 20. The weather is nice, so I enjoy doing activities. A. outdoor B. inside C. outdoors D. boring 21. The cinema is the corner of the street. A. on B. in C. at D. into 22. Going by taxi is more than going by bus. A. cheaper B. faster C. easier D. expensive 23. The streets in the Old Quarter in Ha Noi are not wide. They are . A. exciting B. noisy C. narrow D. quiet 24. A is a place where we can buy medicines, soap, and make-up. A. chemist’s B. grocer’s C. square D. temple 25. David's exam results are than Nick's. A. good B. well C. better D. important 26. Janet is not happy because her results in the competition are than her sister's. A. bad B. good C. better D. worse 27. people own motorbikes now than ten years ago. A. Many B. Much C. More D. Some 28. This type of car is economical than that type. A. more B. much C. many D. as 29. go past the traffic lights, and turn left. A. First - than B. First - then C. Then - first D. Finally - then 30. London, the capital city of England, is a city with many old buildings, and beautiful parks. A. history B. historic C. largest D. larger IV. Complete the sentences with the comparative form of the adjectives in brackets. 31. The Mekong River is the Mississippi River. (short) 32. The Caribbean Sea is the Mediterranean Sea. (large) 33. Mt. Everest is Mount Fuji. (high) 34. Africa is North America. (big) 35. Europe is South America. (small) 36. The streets in Da Nang are and than those in Hue. (noisy/ crowded) 37. Canada is the United States in area. (big) 38. Indonesia is Japan in population. (large) 39. Fruit is for your health candy. (good) 40. This exercise is that one. (easy) V. Complete each blank of the following sentences with ONE suitable word. 41. Every house in Da Nang has a frontyard and a . 42. One thing I don't like about the city is that the air is because of the smoke from factories. 43. The weather in Hue is hotter than in Ha Noi. 44. The streets in Ho Chi Minh City are busy and crowded a lot of motorbikes. 45. left and take the second on your left. Go straight and it's in of you. 46. The houses, shops, and pagodas in Hoi An are older than in other cities in Viet Nam. 47. It is very that you live near your school. 48. Hoi An is a city with a lot of old houses, shops, buildings and theatres, etc. 49. Can you tell us the to "Chua Cau", please? 50. There is a of King Ly Thai To in a small park near Ho Kiem Lake in Ha Noi. VI. Read the passage, and then answer the questions. Many people who work in London prefer to live outside it, and to go to their offices, factories or schools everyday by train, car or bus, even though this means they have to get up earlier in the morning and come home later in the evening. One advantage of living outside London is that houses are cheaper. Even a small flat in London without a garden costs quite a lot to rent. With the same money, one can get a little house in the country with a garden of one's own. Then, in the country one can rest from the noise and hurry of the town. Although one has to get up earlier and spend more time in trains or buses, one can sleep better at night, and during weekends. In summer evenings one enjoy the fresh, clean air of the country. If one likes gardens, one can spend one's free time digging, planting, watering and doing the hundred and one other jobs which are needed in a garden. Notes: - even though/ although : mặc dù - advantage (n) : (sự) thuận lợi - rent (v) : thuê mướn - dig (v) : đào bới, xới - water (v) : tưới nước - of one's own : của riêng mình - mean (v) : có nghĩa là 51. What do many people who work in London prefer? 52. What is one advantage of living outside London? 53. What can a person enjoy when he lives in the country? 54. What can a person get in the country with the same money of a small flat in London? 55. What can a person with the interest in gardening do in the country? VII. Complete the following conversation. A Tourist: Excuse me. Is there a hotel (56) here? Hoa: Yes, there is one (57) Nguyen Trai Street. Tourist: Could you (58) me the way to that hotel? Hoa: Yes, of course. Go straight ahead. (59) the second turning (60) the right. The hotel is beside the supermarket. Tourist: Thank you very much. Hoa: You're welcome. B Tourist: Excuse me. Could you show me the (61) to the souvenir shop, please? Lan: Yes, of course. It's (62) here. It's (63) the corner of the first street. Go straight ahead. It's (64) the bookstore and the shoe shop. Tourist: (65) a lot. Lan: OK, Not at all. VIII. Complete the passage with the words given in the box. My village is about 10 kilometers (66) Da Lat. It is a very beautiful and (67) place where people grow (68) and vegetables only. It is very famous (69) its pretty roses and beautiful landscapes. The air is quite fresh, (70) , the smell of the roses makes people feel cool. In spring, my village looks like a (71) with plenty of colors. Tourists come to visit it so (72) . Nowadays, with electricity, it doesn't take the villagers much time to (73) the roses. And even at night, people can walk along the (74) and enjoy the (75) smell of the flowers. IX. Make sentences using the words and phrases given below. 76. The Japanese Covered Bridge or "Chua Cau" / one/ the most famous tourist attractions/ Hoi An. 77. It/ built/ early/ seventeenth century. 78. "Chua Cau"/ Hoi An/ beautiful example/ Japanese architecture/ that period. 79. It/ built/ by/ Japanese merchants/ make a link/ Chinese quarters/ across/ stream. 80. Inside/ "Chua Cau"/ there is/ temple/ the God of Weather. People/ believe/ he/ control/ all kinds/ weather changes. Unit 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD A. PHONETICS I. Put the words in the correct columns, according to the pronunciation of the underlined parts. coat, coast, but, burst, cot, cost, mat, mast, hot, host, eat, east, net, nest, boot, boost, boat, boast, bet, best, wet, west, lot, lost, pot, post, but, bust, beat, beast. II. Choose the correct italicized word to complete the sentences. Then read the sentences aloud. l. We walked along the coat/ coast for five minutes. 2. Put on your coat/ coast. It's very cold outside. 3. Do you like this hot/ host weather? 4. We thank the hot/ host for the lovely evening. 5. The sun sets in the wet/west. 6. Do you like wet/ west weather? 7. There are a lot/ lost of people here. 8. They always get lot/ lost in London. 9. He brings in a hot tea pot/ post. 10. I will send the photo to you by pot/ post. B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR. I. Use the correct form of the adjectives. 1. city in Canada is Toronto. (large) 2. February is month of the year. (short) 3. Mt. Everest is mountain in the world. (high) 4. Russia is country in the world. (large) 5. George is student in the class. (bad) 6. New York is city in the world today. (large) 7. The story you told was of all (funny) 8. The Pacific is ocean in the world. (large) 9. January is month of the year. (cold) 10. Which is way from here to London? (good) II. Complete the sentences with the correct form of comparatives or superlatives of the adjectives. 1. The Great Wall of China is the world's (long) structure. 2. Ho Chi Minh City is the (big) city in Viet Nam. 3. The Nile River is the (long) river in the world. 4. Burj Khalifa in Dubai is the world's (tall) building. 5. Fansipan is the (high) mountain in Viet Nam. 6. Russia is the (big) country in the world. 7. China has the (big) population in the world. 8. Petronas Twin Towers in Kuala Lumpur is (tall) than Sears Tower in Chicago. 9. Mexico City is (big) than Tokyo. 10. The Mekong River is (long) than the Red River. III. Complete the text about the London Underground. Use must or mustn't. When you travel on the London Underground, you (1) smoke. You (2) always buy a ticket and if you have a travel card, you (3) use it on the same day. When a train arrives at the station, you (3) stand back. You (5) be polite to the staff. IV. Write the sentences to show what you must do in these situations, using the words given in the brackets. Example: I've got an awful headache. (take/ aspirin) I must take an aspirin. l. My hair is too long. (go/ barber's) 2. The kitchen is in a mess. (tidy it up) 3. I've got an awful toothache. (go/ dentist's) 4. I eat too many sweets. (stop eating) 5. I've got a pile of dirty clothes. (wash them) 6. I'm getting too fat. (lose weight) 7. My chair is broken. (buy a new one) 8. My bicycle is very dirty. (wash it) 9. I've got a terrible cold and a cough. (go/ doctor's) 10. I've written three important letters. (go/ post office) C. SPEAKING I. Rearrange the sentences to make a conversation.  Mum And you mustn't eat too much. Or you feel sick.  Rory OK. I'll be careful. Is there anything I can do?  Mum Wait, Rory. You must be home by midnight  Rory I know, Mum. I never eat too much.  Rory Oh, is that an order?  Mum You can have fun!  Rory OK, Mum. I'm off to the party.  Mum That's not true. After your last party, you felt very sick!  Rory I know, Mum. Midnight is usual. II. Match the questions 1-6 to the answers a-f, writing the answer in each blank. 1. Oh, what is special about it?

2. What is your favourite place in Sa Pa?

3. Where do you want to spend your summer holiday?

4. It sounds good. What can you see from there? 5. What's it like? 6. Really? Where is it? a) We can see the whole town below in the white clouds and mist. b) It's next to the town of Sa Pa, and it belongs to the Hoang Lien Son Range in Sapa District. c) It looks like a jaw of a dragon opening wide to the sky. It is a beautiful scenery when the whole landscape is in the mist. d) I want to go to Sa Pa.

e) It's Ham Rong Mountain. f) It's the most wonderful destination for tourists in Sa Pa. Put the questions and answers above in order to make a complete conversation, and then practise it with your classmate. III. Look at the information about the three national parks in Viet Nam. Use the facts in the table to which national park is larger, higher, hotter, the largest, the highest, or the hottest. Area Height above the sea level Average annual temperature Cuc Phuong National Park 22,000 hectares 300 to 600 metres 24.70C Cat Ba National Park 16,200 hectares 150m 23.60C Cat Tien National Park 71,200 hectares 100m 25.20C Example: Cuc Phuong National Park is larger than Cat Ba National Park. Can Tien National Park is larger than Cuc Phuong National Park. Cat Tien National Park is the largest. D. READING I. Tom is on holiday in France, and Daisy in Prague. Their postcards are cut in small pieces. Put the four parts of each postcard: 1-4 for Tom's postcard, and A-D for Daisy's. 1 A       II. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the word following letter. Dear Mary, I'm very glad to know that you are going to visit Ha Noi this summer. Would you like me to tell you something (1) Ha Noi before you go? Well, Ha Noi is a cultural and political center of Viet Nam. In Ha Noi, you can find ancient houses and modern buildings. Ha Noi is a large city now, and there are many places worth (2) . You can visit Ho Chi Minh’s Mausoleum, One-Pillar Pagoda, Kiem Lake and West Lake. Besides, you can enjoy the Vietnamese food, (3) , grilled fish, spring rolls, steamed rolls and "pho" - a special dish of Viet Nam. However, I would like to recommend that you (4) visit Ha Long Bay and Sa Pa because these places attract a lot of visitors due to their magnificent caves, beautiful limestone islands and natural landscapes in Ha Long Bay and their tribal villages, nice mountain slopes and jungles streams in Sa Pa. I am looking forward to seeing you in Ha Noi and I hope you (5) have a nice holiday in Viet Nam. Love Lan 1. A. about B. of C. at D. in 2. A. seeing B. see C. seen D. saw 3. A. as B. of C. such as D. such 4. A. can B. should C. would D. may 5. A. have to B. may C. will D. must III. Read the passage, and then answer the questions. Ba Be Lake is the largest lake in Viet Nam. It is a mountainous area, nearly 250 km from Ha Noi. When you get to the entrance of Ba Be National Park, you have another 16 kilometre drive through the park to arrive at the small village "Pac Ngoi" of Tay Minority You can stay overnight in a local stilt house. The next day you can get on your boat and have a trip on Ba Be Lake. You can enjoy the wonder landscape. During the boat trip can visit some caves and the Dau Dang Waterfall. You can also watch the local communities with their daily life. 1. What is Ba Be Lake? 2. Where is it? 3. How can we visit the small village "Pac Ngo" of Tay Minority? 4. What can we visit during the boat trip on Ba Be Lake? 5. What can we watch the local communities? IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text. Tra Co Beach in Quang Ninh province is 9 kilometers from Mong Cai. It has the (1) and the most romantic beach in Viet Nam. Tourists can enjoy the (2) of white sand beaches and green sea water all year (3) . Visitors can (4) enjoy the sunset or sunrise in Con Mang islet. You can visit Tra Co Communal House, Linh Khanh Pagoda, and Tra Co Church. If tourists want some fresh (5) , they can find it from fishing boats. They can take part in "Tra Co Festival" from May 30 to June 6. 1. A. long B. longer C. longest D. much longer 2. A. beauty B. beautiful C. of beauty D. pretty 3. A. over B. long C. round D. longer 4. A. be B. be able C. then D. also 5. A. seafood B. menu C. air D. water V. Read the passage, and decide whether the sentences are true (T) or false (F). Ayers Rock or Uluru is 860 metres above the sea level. You have to walk 9.4 kilometres around the base of Uluru. In 1958 it was declared the national park. You are mostly to see many kinds of birds and reptiles and more than 400 types of plants in the national parks. There is evidence to show that the Aboriginal people have lived in Central Australia for at 30,000 years. Uluru's rock art was 5,000 years old. In 1873, William Gosse became the first European to see Uluru, naming it after Sir Henry Ayers, the Chief Secretary of South Australia. Each year more than 250,000 people visit the park from all over the world. True/ False 1. Ayers Rock is 860 metres under the sea water. 2. Ayers Rock became a national park in 1958. 3. There are not many types of birds and reptiles in the national park. 4. The Aboriginal people have lived there for a very long period of time. 5. Every year over a quarter of million visitors come to the national park from all over the world. VI. SOUTH AMERICA A. The South America Quiz. Search the Internet to have the correct answers. 1. How many people live in South America? A. about 400 million B. about 200 million C. about 100 million D. about 50 million 2. What are the two main languages in South America? A. Spanish and French B. Spanish and Portugues C. French and Portuguese D. English and Spanish 3. Which is the biggest country? A. Venezuela B. Ecuador C. Chile D. Brazil 4. Which country is not in South America? A. Uruguay B. Viet Nam C. Colombia D. Peru B. Read the texts about geographical features of South America, and give the correct answer. River The Amazon is a very big river. It is more than 6,400 kilometers long. It flows through Peru, Colombia, Ecuador, and Brazil. There is more water in this river than any other river in the world. Lake Lake Titicaca is on the border between Bolivia and Peru. It is 3,810 metres above sea level. It is also a deep lake, in places about 180 metres deep. This lake is almost a small sea. It is more than 190 kilometres long and about 80 kilometres wide. There are also 41 islands in the lake. Waterfall The Angel Falls in Venezuela is nearly 1,000 metres high. In very hot weather the water can evaporate before it reaches the bottom. Desert The Atacama Desert in Chile is about 1,000 kilometres long. It is also 15 million years old. It is very dry: on average there is l mm of rain per year. Rainforest The Amazon Rainforest covers a billion acres including the countries Brazil, Venezuela, Colombia, Ecuador and Peru. It produces about 20% of the planet's oxygen. More than 50% of the world's species of plants, insects and animals live in the Amazon rainforest. 1. How long is the Amazon? 2. What countries does it flow through? 3. Is it the biggest river in the world? 4. Where is Lake Titicaca? 5. How long is it? How wide is it? 6. How many islands are there in the lake? 7. How high is the Angel Falls in Venezuela? 8. Where is the Atacama Desert? 9. How long is the Atacama Desert? 10. How old is the desert? 11. What countries does the Amazon Rainforest cover? 12. How many species of plants, insects and animals live in the Amazon rainforest? VII. Read the text and then complete the fact file about Brazil. FACT FILE Brazil is the largest country in South America. Its capital is Brasilia. About 183 million people live in Brazil and the official language is Portuguese. Some important exports of Brazil are oranges and coffee. The important geographical features of Brazil are the Amazon River, and the Amazon Rainforest. One major problem in Brazil is the destruction of the rainforest. Many animals and plants are disappearing as a result. Many tribes that lived in the rainforest don't exist any more. VIII. American National Parks: Read the texts and answer the questions. A. The Colorado Rockies. The Rocky Mountains were the home of the Apache, Blackfoot and Sioux Indians. They stretch from Alaska to New Rockies. The Rockies are high! The Colorado Rockies are the tallest. People call them "the roof of America" because the tops of the mountain here are 4,401 m. The Colorado Rockies are a popular area to go mountain climbing, fishing, hunting and skiing. B. Yellowstone National Park. This is in Wyoming and is older than the other national parks in America. It is famous for its hot springs and for its grizzly bears. Some of the bears are very big. They are 700 kg. Answer the questions. 1. Who lived in the Rocky Mountains? 2. Why do we call the Rockies "the roof of America"? 3. How high are the tallest mountains in the Rockies? 4. What is Yellowstone famous for? 5. Is Yellowstone National Park the oldest national park in America? E. WRITING I. Write full sentences, using the suggested words and phrases given. l. Mexico City/ big/ city/ world. 2. My brother's room/ big/ my room. 3. London/ small/ Tokyo. 4. Hung/ short/ Ba. 5. Fansipan/ high mountain/ Viet Nam. 6. Nam/ tall/ boy/ his class.

7 Thoa/ beautiful/ girl/ village. 8. The pagoda/ tall/ the temple.   TEST (UNIT 5) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1. A. red B. tent C. end D. forest 2. A. lake B. bag C. take D. nature 3. A. island B. plaster C. cost D. longest 4. A. map B. area C. hat D. plan 5. A. post B. cost C. question D. coast II. Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. 6. A. forest B. mountain C. lake D. city 7. A. walk B. compass C. plaster D. sleeping bag 8. A. waterfall B. beach C. lake D. desert 9. A. hottest B. biggest C. largest D. smaller 10. A. mountain B. valley C. cave D. club III. Choose the correct answers. 11. Tra Co beach is beach in Viet Nam. A. long B. longer C. longest D. the longest 12. Mount Everest is the highest mountain the world. A. in B. on C. at D. of 13. The islands in Ha Long Bay are named things around us. A. in B. after C. with D. at 14. It is often rainy in Hue, remember to bring an umbrella. A. but B. or C. so D. must 15. Which city is : Ha Noi or Ho Chi Minh City? A. large B. larger C. largest D. the largest 16. "Do you finish packing"? – "Yes. All my things are in my " A. back B. backpack C. back pack D. plaster 17. Ha Long Bay is Vietnam's wonder. A. most beautiful natural B. most natural beautiful C. the most beautiful natural D. the most natural beautiful 18. The Amazon . A. Rainforest B. Rainy Forest C. Wet Forest D. Wetter Forest 19. is a large thick bag for sleeping in, especially when you are camping. A. A sleeping bag B. A sleep bag C. A sleepy bag D. A bag for sleeping 20. If we had a , we wouldn't get los. A. backpack B. ruler C. compass D. painkiller 21. You travel alone to the mountain. Always go in a group. A. must B. mustn't C. do D. don't 22. People think Ayers Rock is in the evening when it is red. A. good B. better C. best D. the best 23. You take a lot of warm clothes when you go to Sa Pa in winter. A. must B. mustn't C. can D. can't 24. Ba Be Lake is the largest lake in Viet Nam. A. fresh B. freshwater C. water D. mount 25. The Imperial City in Hue is the greatest . A. tourist attraction B. tourist attractions C. tour attraction D. attraction tourist 26. Ha Long Bay is the number one in Viet Nam. A. nature wonder B. natural wonder C. wonderful nature D. wonder nature 27. You be late for school. It's against the school regulations. A. must B. mustn't C. can D. can't 28. You all necessary things along with you before you start your trip. A. takes B. won't take C. must take D. mustn't take 29. The boat trip to Ca Mau, the southern tip of Viet Nam, was experience of my life. A. good B. better C. best D. the best 30. You must remember to bring a - it's very useful when you go into a cave because it's very dark there. A. scissors B. torch C. clock D. compass IV. Complete each of the following sentences with ONE suitable word. 31. The Sahara is the world's desert in the world. 32. Mount Everest is the mountain in the world. 33. The Imperial City is the greatest tourist in Hue. 34. The travel will give tourists some advice about the trip to Nha Trang. 35. Look at the , and you can choose where to go for your holiday and a lot of information about the place. V. Match a travel item in column A with its meaning in column B, and write the answer in each blank. Answer A B 36. compass a) a large thick bag for sleeping in, especially when you are camping. 37. backpack b) medicine used to reduce or remove physical pain. 38. sleeping bag c) a device for finding direction, with a needle always pointing north 39. painkiller d) a device used for cutting materials such as paper, cloth or hair 40. scissors e) a large bag used to carry things on your back VI. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B, and write the answer in each blank. Answer A B 41. What things can you do in Hue? a) It's Fansipan. 42. What is the highest mountain in Viet Nam? b) Travelling by bus is the best way. 43. What is the other name for Ayers Rock? c) In Ninh Binh Province, about 130 km southwest of Ha Noi. 44. Where is Cuc Phuong National Park? d) We can visit many museums, art galleries, and temples. 45. What is the best way of travelling in a city? e) Uluru. Local people call it Uluru. VII. Complete the conversation with the phrases below. Mandy Can I borrow (46) ? Tom My motorbike? What for? Mandy I have to get something from the shop for Mum. Tom OK, all right. But you (47) by five. And you must park it behind the house. And you (48) faster than 20. And you mustn't let anyone else ride on it. Mandy Anything else? Tom Yeah. You (49) any of your friends. And you mustn't take it dirty. Mandy Is that all? Tom Well, let me think. Mandy You know what, Tom Tom What? Mandy Here's the shopping list. Go and (50) for Mum. And take good care of your motorbike . Tom Hey, wait … VIII. Complete the following passage, using the words in the box. Mui Ne is located 24 km north-east of the city of Phan Thiet. It is a fishing village as well as a (51) tourism area in Binh Thuan Province. It is found on Highway N0. 706, and is famous for sweeping sand dunes and beautiful rows of palm trees. The (52) is shallow and sloped, the (53) is clean and blue and the sun rarely hides behind (54) . Besides beaches and sand dunes, there are also beautiful (55) such as Suoi Tien (Fair Spring), the Ong Hoang Building, and the Poshanu Cham Tower. It has long been (56) the "Hawaii" of Viet Nam. It has (57) roads under coconut trees, a beautiful beach and cliffs. The typical scenery of this place lies in the (58) lines of golden sand, and when they are (59) from distance, they look like moving (60) . IX. Read the passage, and answer the questions. The Amazon River in South America is an amazing and important river for the planet. The Amazon River carries more water than any other river in the world. In fact, the Amazon River is responsible for twenty percent of fresh water that flows into the world's oceans. The Amazon River is the second longest river in the world (the Nile River in Africa is the longest), and about 6,400 km long. The Amazon River has the largest area of land that flows into the river, and more tributaries than any other river in the world - more than 200 tributaries. 61. How many percentage of fresh water flowing into the world's oceans is the Amazon River responsible for? 62. Does the Amazon River carry more water than any other river in the world? 63. How long is the Amazon River? 64. What is the longest river in the world? 65. How many tributaries does it have? X. Use the following sets of words and phrases to write complete sentences. 66. Phu Quoc Island/ large/ island/ Viet Nam. 67. Cuc Phuong National Park/ old/ national park/ Viet Nam. 68. Cat Tien National Park/ large/ national park/ Viet Nam. 69. Landmark 72 in Ha Noi/ high/ building/ Viet Nam. 70. Asia/ big/ continent/ world. XI. Rewrite the following sentences, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same. 71. Ho Chi Minh City with the population of over 8 million is bigger than any other cities in Viet Nam. Ho Chi Minh City is the . 72. Angel Falls is over 1,000 feet higher than any other falls in the world. Angel Falls is . 73. Lake Superior in North America is a freshwater lake; it is larger than any other freshwater lakes in the world. Lake Superior in North America is . 74. Remember to bring the compass: if not we will get lost in the forest. You must . 75. Take a waterproof coat during your trip to Fansipan Mountain because it is rainy there. You . 76. It is very important that you arrive on time at school. . 77. It is very dangerous to walk alone after 10 pm in that park. You . 78. Taking a boat trip around the islands in Ha Long Bay is the most important thing of the trip. You . 79. Antarctica is colder than any other place in the world. Antarctica is . 80. It is wrong of us to write on the walls or tables in our classroom. We .   Unit 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY A. PHONETICS I. Put the words in the correct column according to the pronunciation of the underlined part. II. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1. A. special B. spring C. she D. sugar 2. A. cheer B. child C. peach D. chorus 3. A. tradition B. condition C. celebration D. question 4. A. blossom B. discussion C. rooster D. compass 5. A. rice B. celebrate C. calendar D. smile B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Put the words from the box in the appropriate rows of verbs. go to decorate hang buy visit cook II. Answer the questions. 1. Lan's Vietnamese. Where is she from? 2. Alan's Australian. Where is he from? 3. Nancy is from Canada. What's her nationality? 4. Yoko comes from Japan. What's her nationality? 5. Laura and her friends come from the USA. What is their nationality? 6. He's from Hong Kong. What's his nationality? 7. He's Brian. He's from Australia. What's his nationality? 8. His name's John. He's from Scotland. What's his nationality? 9. Mr. and Mrs. Brown are from Toronto, Canada. What language do they speak? 10. But Michel is from Quebec, Canada. What language does he speak? III. Fill in each blank with "should" or "shouldn't'. 1. The students make so much noise. 2. The film is interesting. You go and see it. 3. Tom drive carefully. The traffic is very heavy. 4. You smoke so much. 5. You give up smoking. 6. You spend more time on your homework. 7. The English girl wants to live in Viet Nam. She learn Vietnamese. 8. He drink so much coffee before bedtime. 9. Tom has a bad toothache. He go to the dentist's. 10. You go to bed so late every night. IV. Complete the sentences with should or shouldn't. l. A: I don't feel very well. B: You go to bed early. 2. A: We're bored. B: You watch so much TV. 3. A: There's a new girl at school called Susanna. B: You invite her to our class. 4. A: don't understand my Maths homework. B: You ask your teacher to explain it again. 5. A: I can't fall asleep at night. B: You drink so much coffee. 6. A: I don't have any money. B: You buy so many DVDs. 7. A: I'm going to live in France for a year. B: You learn some French. 8. A: I got a bad mark in my Science test. B: You study more. V. Write pieces of advice for these situations, using should or shouldn't and the words given in brackets. Example: I feel awfully tired. You should go to bed early. l. My tooth is aching again. (not eat so many sweet things) 2. I have to get up very early tomorrow. (set the alarm clock) 3. I am putting on weight. (do more exercise) 4. I don't feel well. (stay at home) 5. I think I'm short-sighted. (go to the doctor's) 6. I have a pain in my chest. (see a doctor) 7. I lent a friend my English book, but he hasn't given it back. (ask him for it) 8. I have some difficult questions. (work in a group) C. SPEAKING I. Match the sentences to make conversations, writing the answer in each blank. Then practise them. Answer A B 1. I'm tired. a. You shouldn't talk in class. 2. I have a headache. b. You should take it to the vet. 3. My teacher's angry with me. e. You should take an umbrella. 4. My cat's ill. d. You shouldn't eat so much. 5. It's raining outside. e. You shouldn't go to bed so late. 6. There's lots of food during the Tet holiday. f. You should take an aspirin. II. Arrange the sentences in the correct order to make a conversation between Mai and Michiko. Mai asks Michiko about how people in Japan celebrate the New Year. Write the answer in each blank, then practise the conversation. 1. It's on January 1st. It lasts three days through January 3rd. 2. They watch television and then television will broadcast 108 bells. As soon as the 108th bell is rung, people all say "Happy New Year ". 3. What do they usually do next? 4. Yes, they usually decorate their houses with some pine trees on both sides of he door. People also exchange cards and presents. 5. What do people do to celebrate the New Year? 6. They clean and decorate their houses a few days before the New Year. 7. Could you tell me something about Japanese Year? When is the New Year? 8. Some families put on special kimonos to go to visit pagodas. Then they come home and eat the special New Year's Day's food and drink a lot of rice wine. 9. Do they decorate the houses with trees and flowers? 10. I see. And what do they usually do on the New Year's Eve? III. Talk to your classmates which things you will do or won't do this New Year. 1. Visit your grandparents. 2. Visit your relatives. 3. Go out on New Year's Eve to watch fireworks. 4. Go shopping with your mother. 5. Buy fireworks. 6. Buy red envelopes for lucky money. 7. Go to the department stores with your mother to buy new clothes. 8. Help your mother to cook traditional food. 9. Welcome the Tet holiday with your parents at home. 10. Keep your lucky money in the piggy bank. 11. Plant some young trees. 12. Help your mother to clear the table after the meal. 13. Help your parents cook banh chung. 14. Help your father repaint the house. 15. Eat banh chung on the Lunar New Year's Day. 16. Kill a rooster, and take some red feathers from the rooster and stick them to the drawings of the sum in your house. 17. Throw water over other people. 18. Wait for the first footer. 19. Wish your family members good health and good luck. D. READING I. Read the passage and then decide whether the sentences a True or False. Viet Nam's New Year is known as Tet. It begins between January twenty-first and nineteenth. The exact date changes from year to year. Tet lasts ten days. The first three days are the most important. Vietnamese people believe that what people do during those days will influence the whole year. As a result, they make every effort to avoid arguments and smile as much as possible. Vietnamese people believe that the first person through the door on New Year's Day can bring either good or bad luck. Children receive lucky money as they do in other countries. l. Tet occurs in late January or early February. 2. There are two weeks for Lunar New Year. 3. People should not argue with each other at Tet. 4. The first visitor on New Year's Day brings good or bad luck. 5. Only children in Viet Nam get lucky money. II. Read the passage, and answer the questions. It's Christmas Day now. Mr. and Mrs. Brown are buying some presents for the family and their friends. They have got a new TV set and some records for dancing. Mr. and Mrs. Green live in Scotland and they are staying the Browns in London at Christmas. Mr. Green is decorating the Christmas tree in the sitting-room. Mrs. Green is putting some Christmas and colourful lights on it. All people are very happy. 1. What are Mr. and Mrs. Brown doing? 2. Where are Mr. and Mrs. Green staying? 3. What is Mr. Green doing? 4. What is Mrs. Green doing? III. Read the following passage, and decide the statements below are True (T) or False (F). On Christmas Eve, everything is hurried and busy. Offices and public buildings close at one o'clock, but the shops stay open later. Most big cites, especially London, are decorated with colored lights across the streets and enormous Christmas trees. The trains, and buses are crowded with people traveling from all parts of the country to be at home for Christmas. In the homes, there is a great air of expectation. The children are also decorating the house with colored lights. Christmas cards - with the words "Merry Christmas to You" or "Wishing You a Merry Christmas and Prosperous New Year", or "With the Compliments of the Season", etc. - are arranged on shelves, tables, and sometimes hung around the walls. Meanwhile, the housewife is probably busy in the kitchen getting things ready for the next day's dinner. The Christmas turkey is being prepared, the pudding is inspected and the cake is got out of its tin. In small towns and villages, one may still see carol-singers who come and stand in front of the house and sing or play Christmas carols. They collect money in a Christmas box. The money collected is to help old people. l. The shops close at one o'clock on Christmas Eve. 2. Colored lights are decorated across streets in big cities. 3. People expect to be at home on Christmas Eve. 4. Trains and buses are almost empty on Christmas Eve. 5. Colored lights are also decorated at homes. 6. Christmas cards only have wishes for Christmas. 7. Turkey and pudding are traditional food at Christmas. 8. We can see carol-singers in the countryside. 9. The carol-singers collect money for themselves. 10. The money collected is used for a good purpose. IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text. It is a custom for all (1) of a Chinese family to be present at home on the Eve of Chinese New Year for the family gathering. This custom is meant to show the unity of the family for the (2) new year. On the (3) five days of the Chinese New Year, no one in the family is allowed to sweep the floor. The Chinese believe that sweeping the floor (4) drive away all good (5) that the New Year can bring. 1. A. people B. members C. friends D. characters 2. A. to come B. come C. comes D. coming 3. A. one B. first C. next D. all 4. A. should B. must C. will D. mustn't 5. A. luck B. money C. news D. time V. Fill in each blank of the passage with the words in the box. In Canada and the United States, (1) of the most popular days in the year is Halloween. Halloween is on October 31st. It is a day (2) some people dress up in (3) or unusual costumes. For example, they may dress up to look (4) an animal, a person from a book or a movie or a famous person from history. In some places, children go to school in their Halloween costumes. After (5) many young children (6) on their costumes and visit their neighbors. They knock on the door and shout "Trick or Treat!" Then the neighbors give them some (7) , and the children go on to the (8) house. Adults also enjoy dressing up for Halloween. There are usually Halloween (9) in the evening and usually there is a (10) for the best or most unusual costumes. E. WRITING Write two paragraphs about how people in Viet Nam and in Japan celebrate the New Year, using the information from the table. Aspects The Vietnamese The Japanese Preparations - clean the house - decorate the house with peach blossoms and apricot blossoms - cook special foods - clean the house - decorate the house with pine trees - cook special foods Activities on New Year's Eve - meet together and wait for the New Year to come - exchange good wishes - give lucky money to children - go to the pagoda - watch TV and listen to the bell ringing - visit the pagoda Foods and clothes - eat banh chung or banh tet - put on best clothes or traditional clothes - eat special foods and drink rice wine - wear kimonos or special dress People to celebrate with - among family members - among family members

  TEST (UNIT 6) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1. A. decorate B. market C. resolution D. celebrate 2. A. smile B. so C. spring D. noise 3. A. travel B. parent C. hand D. bad 4. A. love B. pagoda C. mother D. come 5. A. lucky B. shy C. why D. buy II. Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. 6. A. blossom B. apricot C. shopping D. flower 7. A. decorate B. envelope C. repaint D. decorations 8. A. visit B. repaint C. wish D. house 9. A. Korea B. Japanese C. Scottish D. Dutch 10. A. rooster B. writer C. gamer D. swimmer III. Choose the correct answers. 11. Do you believe that the first footer us good or bad luck? A. must take B. should bring C. can make D. can bring 12. Students copy their classmates' work. A. should B. shouldn't C. must D. not 13. People in Laos water over one another. A. give B. throw C. take D. bring 14. The American a midnight kiss with someone they love. A. share B. take C. brings D. celebrate 15. People in many countries in the world often wear their clothes on the New Year Day. A. tradition B. traditional C. ordinary D. summer 16. On New Year's Day, children in Korea make a to their parents or elders and wish them a long and healthy . A. bow - live B. friend - lives C. bows - lives D. bow - life 17. I wish you a life and health. A. long - best B. big - good C. long - good D. happy - bad 18. We should help our mothers the table after the meal. A. make B. to make C. clear D. to clearing 19. I will my lucky money in my piggy bank. A. keep B. spend C. borrow D. give 20. At Tet, many people present rice to wish enough food throughout the year. A. in B. at C. for D. with 21. We shouldn't play music after midnight. A. careful B. right C. loud D. easy 22. Some Vietnamese people don't eat shrimps New Year's Day. A. in B. on C. at D. during 23. The Times Square Ball begins its fall millions of voices countdown the final seconds of the year. A. when B. during C. throughout D. because 24. Children should help their parents their house flowers and pictures. A. repaint - with B. make - more beautiful C. decorate - in D. decorate - with 25. New Year's Eve is a night when members of a family often get . A. together B. another C. other D. others 26. January 1st is a day when people in Europe and America New Year. A. see B. remember C. celebrate D. spend 27. On New Year's Day, children lucky money red envelope. A. get - in B. ask - on C. take - at D. have - with 28. In London people cheer and sing when the clock midnight on New Year's Eve. A. gets B. strikes C. see D. goes 29. People believe that water over people will . a lot of rain in the New Year. A. throw - bring B. throwing - bring C. to throw - bringing D. throwing - bringing 30. On New Year's Day, many people put on their best clothes and go to or visit their . A. houses - friends B. pagodas - relatives C. pagoda - relative D. the main room – friend IV. Complete each of the following sentences with ONE suitable word. 31. You knock the door before you enter the office. 32. You eat a lot of fast food because it is not good for your health. 33. In Viet Nam people shouldn't break things at Tet they believe it will bring bad luck for the rest of the year. 34. Temples in Japan their bells 108 times to celebrate the New Year. 35. It is a in America to exchange a midnight kiss with someone they love. 36. Tet is really a time of and festivals throughout the country. 37. Nowadays, the Tet holiday is shorter, but people enjoy the festival very much. Answer A B 38. eve 39. decorate 40. gathering 44. piggy bank 42. celebrate a. a small box often in a shape of a pig that children use for saving money in. b. to do something special or enjoyable on an important day. c. the day or evening before an important event. d. a time when people come together e. to add something in order to make a thing more beautiful to look at. V. Match a word or phrase in column A with its meaning in column B. VI. Choose the questions in column A with the answers in column B. Answer A B

43. When will we visit the pagoda? 44. Will we buy ‘banh chung’ for Tet? 45. Will you spend all your lucky money 46. What will you do to help your parents before Tet? 47. What shouldn't we do during Tet? a. Well, I keep it in my piggy bank. b. We shouldn't play games all day. c. No, we will cook them ourselves. d. On the first day of Tet

e. I help my father to repaint and decorate our house. VII. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following test. There are many Chinese festivals in Hong Kong. The Western New Year starts on the first day of January but the Chinese begin New Year on the first day of the first moon of the Chinese calendar. Before New Year's Day comes, people clean and decorate their houses, (48) a lot of traditional food and go shopping for presents and new clothes. New Year's Eve is the time (49) every family gathers its members together for dinner. People (50) the New Year with a music performance and a firework display to light up the sky. On New Year's Day, they visit their friends and relatives. The children get lucky money in red envelopes. Many people go to the (51) to wish for good health and good luck. Chinese people in Hong Kong celebrate the New Year with (52) and happiness. 48. A. take B. bring C. cook D. sell 49. A. when B. after C. before D. during 50. A. meet B. see C. end D. celebrate 51. A. houses B. pagodas C. family D. camps 52. A. hopeful B. hopeless C. hope D. hoping VIII. Read the text, and then choose the correct answers. The most important celebration holiday in China is the Lunar New Year. At this time, shops are closed. People celebrate by having parties, by paying friendly phone calls to their neighbours, and by visiting the temples or pagodas to promises for the New Year. Children walk through the streets, carrying colourful lanterns and paper figures. Fireworks are also set off to light up the sky. The time of the New Year is also the time at which Chinese people decorate their homes. For example, the windows, which are made of thick paper are torn down, and new ones are put up. This is also the time during which people pay their debts. Everyone tries to settle all his bills before the beginning of the New Year. Before New Year's Eve, people make their homes attractive by decorating them with flowers and plants, and hanging brightly-coloured decorations. 53. This passage as a whole is about . A. paying debts B. China C. the Chinese New Year D. New Year's promises 54. The Lunar New Year is . A. an important Chinese holiday B. the time for having large meals C. a special time for children D. the time when no one is in debt 55. What can we infer from the passage? A. The Chinese have only one holiday. B. The Chinese New Year is happy. C. The Chinese New Year celebration lasts seven days. D. People don't go to church during the Chinese New Year. 56. Which of these sentences is NOT true? A. Fireworks are set off to light up the sky. B. Chinese houses are made of paper. C. Chinese people pay debts at New Year's. D. People also decorate the windows. 57. How can people make their homes attractive? A. By decorating them with flowers and plants. B. By decorating them with brightly-coloured decorations. C. By hanging brightly-coloured decorations outside their homes. D. By decorating them with flowers and plants, and hanging brightly-coloured decorations. IX. Rearrange the sentences in the correct order to make a conversation between Lan and her English friend, Daisy, about Tet in VietNam. Write the answer in each blank. 58. a. What do you usually do at Tet? 59. b. Oh, that sounds really interesting. 60. c. Well, it's on January 27th this year. 61. d. What is Tet? 62. e. Well, we cook a lot of traditional food, visit our relatives and friends, and we also go to pagodas. 63. f. When is it exactly? 64. g. Do you know that the Tet holiday is next week? 65. h. It's the time when Vietnamese people celebrate the beginning of spring. X. Give advice with “should” or “shouldn’t”, using the words given in brackets. Example: You look very pale and terrible. (see a doctor) You should see a doctor. 66. You work until 11 every night. (not work so hard) 67. It's Mai's birthday on Saturday. I think we should do something. (buy her a nice birthday present) 68. The car did not start this morning. (take it to the garage) 69. Our train leaves at 6 o’clock tomorrow morning. (go to bed early tonight) 70. He always gives you the wrong advice. (not listen to him) 71. Everything will be all right. (not worry so much) 72. He doesn’t like this job because it’s so boring. (look for another one) 73. It’s so late to play music so loudly, we’ll wake up the neighbours. (turn it off) 74. Your hair is so long. (have a haircut) 75. He doesn’t understand the lesson. (meet the teacher after class) XI. You the following set of words and phrases to write complete sentences. 76. People/ decorate/ homes/ plants/ flowers. 77. People/ try/nice/ polite/ each other/ because/ they/ want/good luck/ New Year's Day. 78. They/ visit/ relatives/ friends/ they/ exchange/ New Year's wishes. 79. Many people/ go/ pagoda/ have/ happy year/ their family. 80. Tet/ a time/ fun/ festivals/ throughout/ country.   TEST YOURSELF 2 I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. big B. wish C. fish D. high 2. A. pagoda B. torch C. overseas D. sofa 3. A. temple B. messy C. decorate D. department 4. A. museum B. windsurfing C. surround D. diverse 5. A. thrilling B. then C. through D. thread II. Choose the correct answers. 6. Hoi An is a city and it is famous for its old buildings, shops, pagodas and houses. A. history B. historic C. historian D. young 7. My neighbourhood is great for outdoor activities it has beautiful parks, sandy beaches and fine weather. A. because B. so C. but D. and 8. "What are the people there ?" - "They are very friendly." A. love B. liking C. like D. look 9. Ha Noi is exciting than Viet Tri City. A. much B. much more C. more much D. only more 10. The Nile River is the river in the world, the Amazon is the widest. A. long - so B. long - because C. longer - but D. longest – but 11. The Himalayas, a mountain range, is with forests and many kinds of plants and animals. A. large B. wide C. diversity D. diverse 12. If you want to go to the Himalayas, I think you take a waterproof coat because it is cold and rainy there. A. must B. mustn't C. can D. can't 13. The meeting is very important, so you be late! A. must B. mustn't C. should D. shouldn't 14. You take all necessary things along with you before you start the trip. A. should B. shouldn't C. mustn't D. can 15. Tet is for family gatherings. A. time B. the time C. a time D. times 16. Do you think the time to plant trees is spring? A. good B. better C. best D. well 17. In the cinema we eat or drink anything. A. must B. should C. shouldn't D. can 18.We keep quiet in the library so that everyone can enjoy reading books. A. should B. shouldn't C. can D. can't 19. Many foreign visitors come to Ha Long Bay because of its natural . A. beauty B. beautiful C. pretty D. wonder 20. You can have the meaning of a new word by looking it in a dictionary. A. in B. up C. on D. at 21. The Himalayas the world's highest mountain - Mount Everest. A. have B. get C. takes D. contains 22. New Year is one of four important in the United States. A. parties B. events C. festivals D. celebration 23. Is it true that Ha Noi is city in Viet Nam? A. the large B. largest C. larger D. the largest 24. Your vocabulary will get by reading a lot of books. A. nicer B. better C. easier D. higher 25. " " - "It's one of the most beautiful beaches in the world." . A. What is My Khe Beach in Da Nang like? B. What does My Khe Beach in Da Nang look like? C. How does My Khe Beach in Da Nang look? D. What does My Khe Beach in Da Nang like? III. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that bets answers the question about the passage. Thanksgiving Day is a holiday that Americans celebrate the honor of everything the country offered to their ancestors, who were among the first immigrants to the United States. When they first came to America, they saw that there were enough food and opportunity for everyone. They were even helped by the Indians, who taught them how to grow all kinds of new vegetables, such as corn and yams, or sweet potatoes. On Thanksgiving Day, it is traditional to eat a big meal together. Americans eat food that was found here by their ancestors. They usually eat turkey with sweet potatoes, Indian corn bread, and have pumpkin pie for dessert. Every Thanksgiving Day, a giant parade is held by one of the most famous department stores in New York. It is an annual event. And at the end of the parade, children can even see Santa Claus, who is visiting from the North Pole. Santa Claus is invited to remind children and parents that Christmas is not far away. 26. Thanksgiving Day is celebrated . A. to honor the new country B. to remind people of cold winter C. to honor their ancestors D. to remind people of Indians 27. The first white people to America were helped by Indians . A. to know how to grow new vegetables B. to have more opportunities C. to form the new nation D. All are correct 28. The traditional meal on Thanksgiving Day is . A. a big meal with turkey, Indian corn bread, and pumpkin pie B. everything they have C. food provided by the Indians D. food provided by Santa Claus 29. What is the main activity in New York on Thanksgiving Day? A. A giant parade is held by one of the most famous department stores. B. A big march by Santa Claus. C. A giant parade is held by Santa Claus, children and their parents. D. A giant parade is held by the Indians. 30. Santa Claus is invited to the parade on Thanksgiving Day . A. to remind everyone that New Year is not far away B. to remind everyone that a new Thanksgiving Day is coming C. to remind everyone that Christmas is not far away D. to remind everyone of their ancestors IV. Write the following sentences, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same. 31. Antarctica is colder than any other places in the world. Antarctica is . 32. Doing morning exercises every morning is good for you. You . 33. My father has a plan to repaint our house before Tet. My father . 34. Fansipan is higher than any other mountains in Indochina (Viet Nam, Laos, and Cambodia). Fansipan is . 35. Nam is the tallest student in his class. Nobody in Nam's class . V. Write the correct sentences, using the words or phrases given. 36. Tomorrow/ Hoa/ buy/ flowers/ her father's birthday. 37. Nobody/ my class/ better/ Maths/ Minh. 38. Twelve o'clock/ night/ everyone/ say "Happy New Year"/ they/ their friends/ relatives/ good luck. 39. How often/ you/ go fishing/ your father? 40. New market/ inconvenient/ because/ it/ far/ our flat building. VI. Fill in each gap in the passage with one suitable word from the box. Tet is is a national and family (41) . It is an occasion for every Vietnamese to (42) a good time while thinking about the last year and the next year. At Tet, people (43) streets and public buildings, almost all shops are crowded with people (44) for Tet. Tet is a time for family (45) . At home, everything is tidy; people cook special food. First-footing is made when the (46) visitor comes, and parents give children lucky money in red (47) . Tet is also a time for peace and (48) . During Tet, friends, relatives, and neighbours (49) each other their best (50) for the new year.   Unit 7: TELEVISION A. PHONETICS I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. when B. where C. best D. detective 2. A. weather B. newsreader C. teaching D. repeat 3. A. clumsy B. cute C. but D. just 4. A. earth B. thanks C. feather D. theater 5. A. the B. think C. with D. they II. Put the words in the correct column according to the pronunciation of the underlined part. B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Match the words in A with the appropriate words in B to form the correct phrase. A B Answer 1. film channel 1. 2. cartoon control 2. 3. international television 3. 4. remote show 4. 5. game character 5. 6. news button 6. 7. local director 7. 8. volume programme 8.

II. Put the words or phrases in the box in the correct column. We can put some words in more than one column.

People Programmes Kinds of film …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………. …………………………………….. …………………………………….. …………………………………….. …………………………………….. …………………………………….. …………………………………….. …………………………………….. …………………………………….. …………………………………….. III. Choose the word from the box for each description below. 1. : an amusing play or film with a happy ending. 2. : a funny TV show in which the same characters appear in each programme in a different story. 3. : a television programme where people get points by answering questions or doing things. 4. : a television programme that gives facts or information about a subject. 5. : a play for the theatre, television or radio. 6. : a television programme to give the description of the weather for the next few days. 7. : a competition on TV in which people try to answer questions to test their knowledge. 8. : a television programme telling us about the life of birds, elephants, tigers, lions, and so on. 9. : a television programme for schools, and students. 10. : the important items of news read on television. 11. : a person who introduces guests at the right time at an important event. 12. : a programme that tells a story by using moving pictures. IV. Match the questions with the answers. Answer Questions Answers 1. What is the name of your favourite TV programme? a) Because they are colourful and funny. 2. Why do you like the programme? b) It's Steven Spielberg. 3. How many hours a day do you watch? c) In California, USA. 4. What time is the cartoon on? d) In 1926. 5. Who is the director of the film? e) Because it is very exciting. 6. What channel is the film on? f) Twice a week, usually at weekend. 7. Why do you like cartoons? g) About two hours a day. 8. When did John Logie Baird make the first TV set? h) It's the Science programme. 9. How often do you watch football on TV? i) It's on VTV3 10. Where is Hollywood? j) It's at 7:30 pm. V. Make questions for the underlined part in each sentence. 1. I like TV game shows best. 2. TV viewers can know about the weather in their regions from the weather forecast. 3. We go to the zoo twice a month. 4. We can meet in front of the theater at 7.30. 5. Bob likes the comedy because it makes him laugh. 6. The documentary lasts forty-five minutes. 7. Steven Spielberg is the director of the film. 8. On VTV3, there are three films on this week. 9. Millions of children around the world enjoy the cartoon "Hello Fatty!" 10. Pokémon cartoons are made in Japan. VI. Complete the sentences with and, so, but or because. 1. I didn't feel well I stayed at home. 2. He liked her she was happy. 3. I liked Spain I wanted to go home. 4. She likes swimming jogging. 5. We were late there was an accident. VII. Match the sentence halves, writing the answer in each blank. 1. I looked for the key, a. and had to stay at home. 2. My friends were ill b. because I studied very hard. 3. I got good marks on the test c. so we couldn't be home by eleven. 4. The film started at ten, d. so I couldn't buy anything. 5. She likes you a lot e. but I just couldn't find it. 6. I lost my money, f. because she thinks you are very intelligent. VIII. Match the sentence halves in column A and column B to make correct sentences, writing the answer in each blank. Questions Answers 1. The film isn't very good a) so will not watch it. 2. That TV channel attracts millions of TV viewers b) so he can't watch his favourite programme. 3. Although the football matches on TV are very late, c) and it got many international prizes. 4. Life is more comfortable now d) because he likes discovering the universe. 5. The film Titanic was directed by James Cameron, e) many people stay up late to watch them. 6. That programme is very boring f) but the Science programme is on VTV2. 7. Tom often watches the programme "Journey to Jupiter" g) I don't have time to watch it very often. 8. The game show "Who Wants To Be A Millionaire" is on VTV3 h) and I don't enjoy it very much. 9. Nam is going to take a test tomorrow i) because it offers many different interesting programmes. 10. Although I like the Disney Channel very much, j) but neighbours don't spend much time together. IX. Match the beginnings (1-5, 6-10) with the correct endings (a-e, f-j), and write the answer in each blank. l. I want to see a British film and a) I don't know which one. 2. I want to see a British film but b) they are always funny. 3. I want to see a British film or c) let's see what's on at the cinema. 4. I want to see a British film, so d) an American one. I want to see two films. 5. I want see British films, because e) an American one. I don't mind. 6. They're listening to music and f) I don't think it's rock music. 7. They're listening to music, but g) it's very exciting. 8. They're listening to music, or h) watching TV - I'm not sure. 9. They're listening to music, so i) they can't hear me. 10. They're listening to music, because j) playing computer games at the same time. C. SPEAKING I. Complete the conversation with the clauses below. Then practice it with your partner. Diana Hi. Jim, did you enjoy the film last night? Jim We didn't see it because (1) . Diana Why didn't you ask someone the way? Jim Well, we asked an old lady and (2) . Diana So what was the problem? Jim She gave us directions but (3) . Diana The wrong cinema? What did you do? Jim We didn't want to see the film there so (4) . II. Complete the conversation with the phrases below. Then practice it with your partner. Lien: (1) of TV programs do you like best? Hong: I like to watch women's program best. (2) ? Lien: I prefer listening to music. Hong: There is a good music performance at Lan Anh Club this weekend. (3) to go with me? Lien: I'd love to, but (4) . I have to go to my cousin's birthday party on Saturday evening. Hong: (5) go on Sunday. Lien: That's great. D. READING I. Reading the passage, and answer the questions. Today, there is a TV set in nearly every home. People watch television every day, and some people watch it from morning until night. Americans watch television about 35 hours a week. But is television good or bad for you? People have different answers. Some say that there is a lot of violence on TV today, the programs are terrible and people don't get any exercise because they only sit and watch TV. Others think that TV programs bring news from around the world, help you learn many useful things, especially children. Thanks lo television, people learn about life in other countries, and it helps people relax after a long day of hard work. 1. Is television very popular nowadays? Why? 2. How many hours do Americans watch TV a day? 3. Why don't some people like watching television? 4. What does television bring to you? 5. What do you learn from television? II. Read the article and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). Information about what happens in the world comes to us in many ways. Television and radio are two important ways of the news. They get the news out faster than the newspapers and magazines, and they don't have to be read. Television and radio stations broadcast the news several times each day. In America, there are the news programmes every hour. People can choose the favourite TV programmes, such as sports, films, fashion, news, etc. People who cannot read get the news from television or radio easily. True False 1. There are only two ways of getting the news.   2. Television and radio get the news faster than other ways.   3. Television stations broadcast the news several times each day.   4. People cannot choose the TV programmes that they like.   5. Television can bring the news to people who cannot read.  

III. Read the text and tell the names of the people in Bart Simpson's family and their jobs. Bart Simpson is the star of the Simpsons, a popular American TV programme. Eleven million Americans watch it every week. The Simpsons live in Springfield and Bart goes to Springfield Elementary School. He's very lazy and he isn't popular with the teachers, but his classmates like him. Bart has two sisters, Lisa and Maggie. Lisa is very intelligent and she studies hard. Maggie is a baby. Bart's parents are Homer and Marge. Homer works at a power station from Monday to Friday and watches TV at weekends. Marge stays at home with Maggie. 1. Bart Simpson: 2. His two sisters: 3. His father: 4. His mother: E. WRITING Write a short paragraph about your favourite TV programme. Use the clues given. 1. What is the name of your favourite TV programme? - Game show: Children are Always Right. 2. What is it about? - To test your general knowledge about nature, science, etc. 3. What channel is it on? - On VTV3. 4. When is it broadcast? - At 8.30 pm on Saturday. 5. Why do you like it? - Useful, interesting, and exciting. 6. What can you learn from the programme? - Interesting facts about the nature, and the world.   TEST (UNIT 7) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. thirty B. theme C. both D. them 2. A. brother B. weather C. through D. than 3. A. schedule B. comedy C. red D. when 4. A. channel B. game C. national D. relax 5. A. show B. programme C. sport D. most II. Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. 6. A. comedian B. newsreader C. film producer D. programme 7. A. cartoon B. world news C. studio D. documentary 8. A. popular B. reporter C. exciting D. educational 9. A. boring B. international C. national D. local 10. A. viewer B. audience C. watcher D. director III. Choose the correct answers. 11. Disney Channel is one of the most channels children . A. good - for B. exciting - of C. popular - to D. popular - for 12. My family enjoys watching game shows they are very exciting and interesting. A. because B. so C. but D. and 13. VTV is a television channel in Viet Nam, and it attracts millions of TV viewers in Viet Nam. A. wide B. local C. international D. national 14. "What is your . TV programme?" - "It's cartoons" A. good B. favourite C. best D. like 15. " do you like the Modern English programme? " - "Because it helps me with my English." A. What B. How C. When D. Why 16. My brother wants to become a to tell TV viewers what the weather is like. A. newsreader B. actor C. weatherman D. producer 17. TV can join in some game shows through telephone or by mail. A. people B. weathermen C. newsreaders D. viewers 18. are films by pictures, not real people and often for children. A. Documentaries B. Love stories C. Cartoons D. Detective stories 19. Are there any good programs teenagers on TV tonight? A. to B. for C. of D. with 20. My father works late tomorrow, so he will the first part of the film on VTV1. A. miss B. lose C. forget D. cut 21. That TV programme is not only interesting it also teaches children many things about family and friendship. A. but B. so C. and D. because 22. " is the weather forecast programme on?" - "At 7.30 pm every day." A. What B. How C. When D. Where 23. the newsreader on BBC One reads very fast, my brother can hear everything in the news. A. But B. Although C. When D. But 24. Children can participate in a TV for a game show or a quiz show. A. channel B. competition C. studio D. cartoon 25. Millions of children around the world enjoy the cartoon because it can both and a young audience. A. entertain - education B. entertainment – education C. entertainment - educate D. entertain - educate 26. Many people with different skills work hard quality programmes for television. A. produce B. to produce C. producing D. to producing 27. The football match is on at 2 am I can't watch it. A. so B. although C. but D. then 28. My father likes watching sports on VTV3. A. matches B. channels C. events D. athletes 29. If you want to know what the weather is like tomorrow, watch the . A. weather forecast B. music show C. game show D. quiz show 30. " is that TV programme directed by?" - "By a famous Vietnamese director." A. What B. Where C. When D. Who IV. Choose the right word from the box for each description below. 31. : a person who tells the actors, cameramen, etc. what to do in a programme, film, play, etc. 32. : an actor who makes people laugh by telling jokes. 33. : a person who finds and speaks the news on the television. 34. : a person that makes television programme. 35. : a person who operates a camera for a film or a television programme. V. Make questions for the underlined part in each sentence. 36. Watching too much TV is not good because it hurts your eyes. 37. We often read books and play sports in our free time. 38. The Wingless Penguin is about the adventure of a child penguin who has no win. 39. Children love the Wingless Penguin series because the child penguin is so cute, clever, and funny. 40. The programme is on the Disney Channel. 41. The TV programme "Let's Learn" appears in over 80 countries. 42. Both parents and their children enjoy the programme. 43. The Animals programme is on at 8 o'clock Wednesday night. 44. I watch TV one or two hours a day. 45. I can get enough information for my essay by watching TV and visiting some websites. VI. Match the questions with the answers, and write the answers in the blanks. Questions Answers 46. What time is the film on VTV3 on? 47. Who is the favourite VTV newsreader this year? 48. What will the Animals programme tell people about? 49. Why can't you watch the football match on VTV3 tonight? 50. What's your favourite cartoon? 51. How long does the film last? 52. What is the event in the Sports programme this evening? 53. Who is the leading actor in that film? 54. What kind of TV programme do you like most? 55. Why do children like the TV series? a) It's the Formula 1 Racing 46 in Malaysia. b) Because they are interesting and entertaining.

c) It's Johnny Depp.

d) It's the Cartoons programme.

e) At 9 pm. f) It's Mr Quang Minh. g) It's about the life of birds, elephants, tigers, lions, etc. h) Because it's too late. i) Of course, it's Tom and Jerry.

j) About one and a half hour. VII. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text. Television first came some sixty years ago in the 1950s. Nowadays, it is one of the most (56) sources of entertainment for both the old and the young. Television brings (57) for children, world news, music and many other (58) . If someone likes sports, he can just choose the right sports, (59) . It is not difficult for us to see why (60) is a TV set in almost every home today. 56. A. cheap B. expensive C. popular D. exciting 57. A. news B. cartoons C. sports D. plays 58. A. sets B. reports C. channels D. programmes 59. A. athletes B. channel C. time D. studio 60. A. it B. this C. that D. there VIII. Read the passage, and decide whether the sentences are true (T) or false (F). Television is an important invention of the 20th century. It has been so popular that we can't imagine what life would be like if there were no television. Television is a major means of communication and entertainment. It brings pictures and sound from around the world into millions of homes. Through television, viewers can see and learn about people, places and things in distant lands. Television widens our knowledge by introducing new ideas which may lead us to new hobbies and recreations. In addition to the news, television provides us with a variety of programs that can satisfy every taste. Most people now seem to like spending their evenings watching television than to go out. 61. Television is an important means of communication. 62. Television provides us with a variety of programs. 63. Most people don't like watching TV in the evening. 64. Television can't satisfy all our tastes. 65. People can learn many things through TV. IX. There is ONE mistake in each sentence, try to find the mistake and correct it. 66. There are much music programmes on TV nowadays. 67. The Discovery Channel makes education funny for children all over the world. 68. Would you like go to the theater with me tonight? 69. Although I enjoy sports every much, but I don't often watch the Sports programmes. 70. The News programme help TV viewers know about what happens every day in their country as well as all over the world. X. Rewrite the following sentences, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same. 71. Cartoons are colourful and funny: that's why children enjoy watching them. Children enjoy watching cartoons 72. VTV Channels offer many interesting programmes in different subjects. VTV Channels are broadcast in several languages. VTV Channels offer many interesting programmes in different subjects 73. That film is very famous in the USA but not many Vietnamese people know it. Not many Vietnamese people know that film 74. Many people think the Fashion programme is only for women; the programme is for everyone. Many people think the Fashion programme is only for women 75. I am going to have a test tomorrow; I can't watch the cartoon. I am going to have a test tomorrow XI. Make sentences using the words and phrases given. 76. Game show/ this week/ test/ knowledge/ rain forests. 77. Questions/ quiz show/ about different subjects/ grade one/ grade six. 78. That singer/ live show/ theater/ be/ TV/ tomorrow. 79. That channel/ tell/ people/ life/ animals/ world. 80. Show/ help/ us/ remember/ childhood.   Unit 8: SPORTS AND GAMES A. PHONETICS SPORTS AND GAMES I. Put the words in the correct column according to the pronunciation of the underlined part. II. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. A. hear B. fear C. dear D. wear A. near B. appear C. bear D. idea A. here B. there C. series D. sphere A. Mary B. air C. chair D. marry A. prepare B. carry C. share D. fair B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Fill the words or phrases from the box into the correct column. do go play …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… II. Complete the table with the sports in the box. III. Complete the sentences with the correct form of do or play. 1. Do you often exercise? 2. My brother basketball for the school team. 3. I like tennis. 4. My friend judo twice a week. 5. My mum yoga at the new sports centre. 6. We gymnastics at school yesterday. 7. My dad football for the town team when he was young. 8. My sister enjoys table-tennis in her free time. IV. Complete the sentences with the correct words. You can see the first letter of each word. I usually 1c to school. I have an old bike so I don't worry about it. Sometimes when it is raining, I go to school 2b car. At the weekend, I usually go to my friend's house. He lives fifty metres away from me so I can 3w there in one minute. I often visit my grandparents. They live on the fourth floor. I usually 4t the elevator, but sometimes it doesn't 5t and I 6w 7u the 8s . It's good exercise. V. Complete the sentences with the verb + -ing. 1. John loves judo. 2. They enjoy the Olympics on TV. 3. We really like in the Alps in winter. 4. Sam hates rugby but he likes football. 5. I don't like in the pool at the sport centre. 6. Do you like running in the morning? VI. Complete the sentences with the correct words from the box. 1. In basketball you the ball on the floor. 2. In tennis you the ball. 3. In football you the ball. 4. In rugby you the ball to people in your team. 5. In football the goalkeeper needs to the ball. 6. In hockey you never the ball. VII. Give the names of the sports, using the words or phrases given. 1. : bicycle, pedals, tyre, cap. 2. : gloves, ring, heavyweight, champion. 3. : ball, low net, table, round bats. 4. : ball, kick, score, goal, referee. 5. : large ball, open net, metal ring, throw. 6. : shuttlecock, high net, hit. 7. : large ball, high net, hands, hit, (not to touch) ground. 8. : pool, goggles, swimsuit. 9. : skis, downhill, snow. 10. : boat, sails, wind, sailor. 11. : racket, central net, small ball, hit, small ground. 12. : square board, pieces, move, king. VIII. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. I (not be) very happy yesterday. 2. I (buy) a ticket for the football match yesterday. 3. Kate (not know) about the exam and she did very badly. 4. I went to the shop but I (not have) any money. 5. It (be) a great film in 2010. 6. I (leave) my school bag at school this morning. 7. Our teacher (tell) us to be quiet yesterday. 8. The people in the café (not be) friendly when I was there yesterday. IX. Make questions and answers, using the cues given. 1. A: you/ be in the bathroom/ when/ I/ phone? B: No/ not. I/ be asleep. A: B: 2. A: you/ like/ the present/ I/ give/ you? B: Yes/ I. It/ be/ great. A: B: 3. A: Where/ you/ go on holiday/ last year? B: We/ go/ Da Lat. We/ have/ a great time. A: B: 4. A: How many people/ be/ the party/ last night? B: There/ be/ ten people. It/ not be/ a good party. A: B: X. Complete the sentences with the past form of the verbs from the box. 1. The firemen the woman from the burning house. 2. My father Maths at university. 3. The programme was very funny, we a lot. 4. The teacher me lots of questions yesterday. 5. You're late! The lesson ten minutes ago. 6. It was very cold so we the window. 7. After the film, we home. 8. The cat up into the tree. 9. I to pick the bag up, but it was very heavy. 10. We were very tired so we walking. XI. Complete the funny story with the Past Simple of the verbs in brackets. It (1. be) Sunday, the day of the big game. The players (2. arrive) early. They (3. be) excited. Everyone (4. want) to play. There (5. be) lots of people in the stadium. They (6. wave) and (7. cheer) when the players (8. walk) on to the ground. The referee (9. call) the captains to the middle. The referee (10. ask) . "Where is the ball?" Nobody (11. answer) . All the players (12. look) at the ground. There (13. be) no ball. The referee (14. cancel) the game. XII. Read about Fiona Campbell's journey. Fill in the gaps with the Past Simple of the verbs in brackets. Fiona Campbell was the first woman to walk around the world. She (1. start) her journey in the UK in 1983 and then in 1985 she (2. walk) across the USA. In 1988 she (3. go) from Sydney to Perth in only 95 days. On April 2nd 1991, Fiona (4. leave) Cape Town in South Africa. She (5. arrive) in Morocco 29 months later - a journey of 10,000 miles. Then she (6. walk) across Europe and (7. finish) her journey in October 1994. She (8. travel) 19,586 miles and (9. raise) £120,000 for charity. Fiona also (10. write) a book about her journey called The Whole Story. XIII. Complete the text. Use the past simple of the verbs in brackets. Last year my family (1. go) to Greece on holiday. We (2. meet) a lot of new people and I (3. take) a lot of photographs. We (4. stay) in a good hotel near the sea, and there (5. be) a lot of things to do there. Unfortunately, on the first day I (6. have) some problems. I (7. hit) my head on the bathroom door and then I (8. cut) my finger, so for two days I (9. read) a lot of books and (10. play) games on my laptop. After that I (11. do) a lot of things - swimming, sailing, and so on. When we (12. leave) , I (13. be) really tired! I (14. tell) Dad that I needed another holiday! C. SPEAKING I. Complete the conversation with the words in the box. Pauline: You look tired. Owen: I am. I (1) football this morning. Pauline: What was the (2) ? Owen: 5-1 to (3) . Pauline: Oh (4) . Owen: It's not the (5) of the world. I (6) our goal. II. Match the questions and answers, and then write the answers in the blanks. 1. What's your favourite sport? a. No, not really. 2. Who's your favourite sportswoman? b. Three or four times a week. 3. How often do you go swimming? c. She's a skier - but I can't think of her name right now. 4. What's your favourite football team? d. Liverpool. 5. Do you like volleyball? e. Running III. Reorder the phrases to make a conversation. Conversation 1  Christina I'm spending the evening at school.  Michelle Really? A long evening.  Christina Yeah, we're having a video evening with our language teachers.  Michelle At school?  Christina Yeah, until midnight.  Michelle Cool. Can I come too? 1 Michelle What are you doing tomorrow evening, Christina? Conversation 2  Oliver OK. See you on Monday then! 1 Tim What are you doing this weekend?  Oliver Oh, they're fun! There's a lot of great rides.  Tim No, thanks. I don't really like theme parks.  Oliver I'm going to Luna Park with some friends. Would you like to come?  Tim Anyway, I'm going to the youth club on Saturday, then I'm going to football match on Sunday. IV. Complete the conversation with the words below. Nicole What's your (1) sport, Matthew? Mathew Hmm, probably basketball. But I also like (2) . Nicole Are you a good tennis player? Matthew I'm OK, I think. Nicole How (3) do you play a week? Matthew What? Tennis or basketball? Nicole Both. Matthew Well, I play tennis (4) a week, and basketball four times a week. I'm in a team. Nicole Oh really? You do a lot of sport. Matthew True. What about you? What's your favourite (5) ? Nicole Watching basketball on TV. Matthew Oh, would you like to watch tomorrow's (6) with me? Nicole Sure, why not? V. Read the three conversations, and then do the tasks. 1 Rosy: Hello, there. Where are you going? Diana: I'm going to the gym. I do exercise there twice a week. Rosy: I went to the gym last month, but I didn't like it. It was full of noisy teenagers. Diana: You can join this gym. It's nice and quiet. Rosy: Really? Where is it? Diana: On High Street. Why don't you come and see it? Rosy: OK, great. Let's go. 2 Frank: Hi, there. My name's Frank. Lisa: Hello, I'm Lisa. Frank: Pleased to meet you. How do you know Nigel? Lisa: I'm his cousin. Frank: Oh, right. So do you live near here? Lisa: No, I'm from Banbury but my family are staying there this week so Nigel invited me here to his birthday party. Frank: I'm very glad. Hey, Lisa. Do you play table-tennis? 3 Simon: Hello. Are you new here? David: Yes, I am My name's David. Simon: Hi, David. I'm Simon, the teacher here. So, you're interested in judo. David: Yes, I am. I love watching it on the TV and I saw your poster in the shopping centre. Simon: Great. Well, there are nine other people coming here every week so you're the tenth. Let me introduce the others to you. David: Yes. Thanks. Sorry, I'm a bit nervous. Simon: Don't worry. There aren't any exams today! A. Match the conversations (1-3) with the situations (a-d). There is a one extra situation. Conversation 1 a. At a party. Conversation 2 b. At a sports lesson. Conversation 3 c. At a shopping centre. d. In the street. B. Decide whether the sentences are true (T) or false (F). 1. Rosy went to the same gym that Diana now goes to. 2. Rosy goes to the gym with Diana. 3. Lisa doesn't live in the same town as Frank. 4. It is Lisa's birthday party. 5. David came to the judo lesson because he saw information about the classes on TV. 6. Simon now has ten students in his class. D. READING I. Read the passage, and then answer the questions. Hoa is student in class 6B. She likes sports very much. She goes swimming in the afternoon. She plays badminton on weekend and does aerobics every day. I play table tennis with her. Sports are very good. 1. Does Hoa like sports? 2. What does she do in the afternoon? 3. Which sports does she play on weekend? 4. Does she do aerobics every day? 5. Are sports good? II. Read the passage, and then decide whether the sentences are True or False. Nam and Tan are students in grade 6. They are good friends. At school, they are in the same class. They live near school, and they walk to school every morning. In the afternoon, they often go to their sports club. They like sports very much. Nam plays badminton, and Tan plays table tennis. Sometimes they go swimming or play soccer with their classmates. They don't have time to go camping. 1. Nam and Tan are not in the same class. 2. They are good friends. 3. They go to school by bicycle. 4. In the afternoon, they often go to their sports club. 5. Nam plays table tennis. 6. They don't play sports with their classmates. 7. They go swimming every day. 8. They never go camping. III. Read the story and decide if the sentences are true (T) or false (F). On Saturday, Patricia was in the park when she saw a boy on a mountain bike. He was on the hill when suddenly he fell off his bike. Patricia ran over to help. "Where's my helmet?" he shouted. It was under a park bench so Patricia went to get it. Just then another boy ran past, took the boy's mountain bike and rode away. "Stop!" Patricia shouted. She ran after the other boy and stopped him. He got off the bike and ran away. Patricia took the bike back to the boy, "Thank you, Patricia," he said. "How do you know my name?" Patricia asked. "I live next to you," he said. "My name's Tom". On Sunday Tom left some flowers on her doorstep to say "thank you". 1. Patricia was in the street when she saw a boy on a mountain bike. T/F 2. The boy fell off his bike. T/F 3. Another boy rode away with his helmet. T/F 4. Patricia stopped the other boy and took the bike back. T/F 5. Tom gave Patricia a CD to say "thank you". T/F IV. Read the passage, and then answer the questions. Nam has some plans for this Sunday. First, in the morning he is going to the sports club to play table tennis with Lan and Ba. Next, in the afternoon he is going to buy some books at the bookstore and after that he's going to go swimming with Thanh and Tan. Finally, he is going to the movie theater with his parents and his sister in the evening. 1. What is Nam going to do on Sunday morning? 2. What is he going to do in the afternoon? 3. Is he going to play soccer on Sunday afternoon? 4. Where is he going in the evening? 5. Who is he going to the movie theater with? V. Read the information and complete the table with a tick () or a cross (). Tent Beach Water sports Café Helen Julia Sara - Helen is having a holiday with some friends at the beach. - Julia usually stays with her aunt, but this year she's camping with some friends. - Swimming is Sara's favourite activity, and she always goes to the beach during the holidays. - Helen's holiday flat is near the Plaza Hotel. - There's a nice café in the hotel and Helen often has lunch there. - Julia goes swimming in the sea every day. - Sara is sharing a tent with two other girls. - Someone is teaching Julia how to water-ski while she's on holiday. - Helen doesn't go in the water because she can't swim. - Sara is learning a new sport - she's having swimming lessons with Julia. - Julia loves the Plaza Café, but she doesn't eat there every day. - Sara never goes out for lunch or dinner because she doesn't have much money. VI. Read the text and answer the questions. Sun, Sea, and Sport Australians love sport. They play it, they talk about it and they watch it on TV. Australian weather is perfect for sport, and there are thousands of great beaches, so swimming is very popular. The population of Australia is only about 20 million, but many of the best sportsmen and sportswomen in the world come from Australia. Young people in Australia are very active. More than 60% of children go to sports clubs. They also do activities with friends such as skateboarding, cycling, and rollerblading. The most popular sports for boys are football, swimming, Australian Rules football, tennis, cricket, basketball, rugby, martial arts, athletics, and hockey. The most popular sports for girls are netball, swimming, tennis, basketball, gymnastics, football, athletics, martial arts, hockey, and horse riding. 1. What do Australians think of sport? 2. Why is swimming popular? 3. Which three sports are only popular with boys? 4. Which three sports are only popular with girls? E. WRITING I. Put the words in the correct order. 1. which/ you/ do/ sports/ at/do/ school? 2. do/ when/ do/ you/ sport? 3. favourite/ are/ your/ who/ sports stars? 4. do/ you/ go/ how often/ running? 5. team/ sports/ play/ you/ do? 6. what/ TV/ you/ do/ on/ sports/ watch? 7. football/ is/ what/ favourite/ your/ team? 8. swimming/ you/ do/ go/ how often? II. Read the email, and then follow the instructions. Hi Linda, How are you? Thanks for your email. I think sports at school in Viet Nam are different from sports in Canada. At school we do lots of PE (Physical Education) and in winter we play ice hockey - it's the national sport of Canada. I love going really fast on the ice! At our school girls and boys play rugby too. I don't like because I am very bad at throwing and catching the ball, but I like watching our school rugby team when they play. In the summer, we play table tennis and do athletics. I'm OK at table tennis and I'm really good at athletics because I can run fast. I run the 100m, 200m. There are lots of after-school sports clubs at my school: football, volleyball, basketball, and judo. I do judo on Tuesday and Thursday evenings. Sometimes in the summer I go swimming with my friends at the weekend and in winter we often go ice skating. I love ice skating - it's great. Write soon. Amy Write an email to your friend about the sports at your school and the sports you do. Write about: the sports you do at school the sports you like/ don't like the sports you're good at/ bad at   TEST (UNIT 8) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. square B. badminton C. grandfather D. match 2. A. idea B. reason C. feature D. teacher 3. A. easy B. please C. weak D. pear 4. A. goggles B. sport C. stop D. not 5. A. match B. machine C. champion D. chess II. Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. 6. A. basketball B. volleyball C. football D. chess 7. A. marathon B. running C. swimming D. high jump 8. A. net B. ball C. racket D. bicycle 9. A. swimmer B. gym C. athlete D. player 10. A. sporty B. play C. hit D. kick III. Choose the correct answers. 11. I usually play football when I have . A. spare time B. good time C. no time D. times 12. In team sports, the two teams against each other in order to get the better score. A. are B. do C. make D. compete 13. draw on the walls and tables, please . A. Do B. Don't C. Should D. Shouldn't 14. Nam plays sports very often, so he looks very . A. sport B. sports C. sporty D. sporting 15. Last summer, I fishing with my uncle in the afternoon. A. go B. went C. goes D. going 16. I like watching football matches, but I am not very good playing football. A. at B. in C. on D. for 17. Team sports are sometimes called sports. A. compete B. competition C. competitor D. competitive 18. " do you do judo?" - "Twice a week.". A. When B. Where C. How often D. Why 19. sports do you like watching on TV? . A. How B. What C. Do D. How often 20. Football is regarded the most popular sport in the world. A. for B. as C. like D. of 21. Sports and games an important part in our lives. A. play B. do C. go D. make 22. When you go to the zoo, don't the animals. A. play B. do C. tease D. watch 23. Playing sports helps us get . A. fat B. free C. fittest D. fitter 24. Nam's dream is to become a . A. loser B. champion C. contest D. gamer 25. "I'd like to watch motor racing because it is very ." A. frightening B. exciting C. excited D. boring 26. My sister often badminton in her free time. A. play B. plays C. playing D. to play 27. Marathon is considered a/an sport. A. team B. individual C. indoor D. sporting 28. Our school football team the match with Tran Phu School last Sunday. A. wins B. won C. scores D. scored 29. Tam three goals for our team and made it a hat trick. A. scores B. scored C. plays D. played 30. Blackburn Rover is at the bottom of the league. They most of their matches this season. A. played B. won C. lost D. scored IV. Complete the short conversations. Choose the correct answer: A, B or C. 31. "I enjoy playing tennis." A. - "I don't like reading." B. - "Where do you play?" C. - "In the afternoons." 32. "It's sunny today." A. - "I like camping." B. - "How much is the ticket?" C. - "Yes. Do you want to go to the beach?" 33. "I love football." A. - "What's your favourite team?" B. - "Do you like football?" C. - "I'm watching a match." 34. "Can you pick up the ball, please?" A. - "I play football on Tuesdays." B. - "Yes, of course I do." C. - “Yes, here you are." 35. "What is the most popular sport in our country?" A. - "Yes, I play football every Sunday." B. - "You know I do judo twice a week." C. – “I think football is" Answer A B 36. Which sports do you play? a) Once a week. 37. What does your brother do in his spare time? b) Just a racket. 38. How often do you do karate? c) I play table tennis. 39. What should I bring to play table tennis? d) Well, OK. 40. Will you come with me this Sunday morning? e) He plays football. V. Match the questions with the answers, and write the answer in each blank. VI. Read the passage, and then decide whether the sentences are True or False. I have three good friends: Ba, Lan and Hoa. They like sports. Ba likes soccer and tennis; Lan likes badminton; and Hoa likes aerobics. They all like watching soccer on television. Ba often plays soccer in the afternoon with his classmates at the weekend. Lan plays badminton twice a week; and Hoa does aerobics on Thursday and Sunday. Lan and Hoa play sports at the sports club. 41. Ba, Lan and Hoa like the same sports. 42. Ba plays soccer every day. 43. Lan plays badminton three times a week. 44. Hoa does aerobics twice a week. 45. Lan and Hoa play sports at home. VII. Read Leo's report about his favourite sport. Choose the correct answer A, B or C. "Water polo is a new sport at our school, but we have a good team now. We practise after school on Thursday at the Northside Pool and we're doing well in the National Schools Competition. There are seven players in a water polo team. The game is a bit like football because each team tries to score a goal with a ball. But in water polo you don't use your feet - you catch and throw the ball with one hand. And you never stop swimming. A game lasts 32 minutes, and in that time you swim up and down a 30-metre pool lots of times. If you aren't fit, water polo isn't the sport for you! For me, it's great, because I love being in the water and I can swim fast. I also enjoy being part of a team. We have some excellent players and we're all good friends. So it's fun, and it's also a fantastic way to get fit." Leo Johnson 46. People play water polo . A. in a stadium B. in a swimming pool C. at the beach 47. His team plays . A. well B. badly C. in a new competition 48. Water polo players . A. often play football B. bounce the ball C. doesn't kick the ball 49. In a water polo game, players . A. can't use their hands B. sometimes swim 30 metres C. swim all the time 50. Leo . A. isn't very fit B. can swim quickly C. likes playing individually VIII. What do you say in these situations? 51. The class is very noisy when the teacher is away for a few minutes. You say, " " 52. Nam watches too much television but doesn't play any sports. You say, " " 53. The examinations are coming, but your classmate, Hung, doesn't study hard enough. You say, " " 54. The pool is very deep, and it also has rocks. You say, " " 55. Teasing wild animals is very dangerous. You say, " " IX. Put the words in the correct order. 56. go/ do/ weekend/ on/ always/ fishing/ parents/ their? 57. every/ play/ day/ badminton/ Lan/ does? 58. now/ doing/ she/ aerobics/ is. 59. children/ to/ movies/ do/ the/ how/ go/ the/ often? 60. often/ video/ the/ games/ plays/ Nam/ afternoon/ in. 61. a/ the/ sometimes/ students/ picnic/ have. 62. camping/ they/ go/ do/ sometimes? 63. usually/ his/ swimming/ with/ friends/ he/ goes. 64. sailing/ my house/ my classmate Nam/ on the river/ last summer/ went/ with/ I/ near. 65. your eyes/ swimming/ should/ when/ goggles/ you/ you/ go/ wear/ to protect X. Make questions for the underlined part in each sentence. 66. The Olympics Games are held once every four years. 67. The children are playing tug of war. 68. The first Olympic Games took place in Greece in 776 BC. 69. Pelé began his career at the age of 15. 70. I really like swimming because it helps me keep fit. XI. There is ONE mistake in each sentence, try to find the mistake and correct it. 71. Unluckily, we won the game although we practised a lot. 72. His team promise that they should win the match next summer. 73. His favourite sport is table tennis, although his father will give him a racket for his 13th birthday. 74. Can you say the difference between a sport and a game? 75. In my spare time, I do judo and play a lot of running. XII. Rewrite the following sentences, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same. 76. My brother plays football very well. My brother is . 77. Mai likes playing badminton most. Badminton is . 78. Sports and games are very important in children's lives. Sports and games play . 79. Children take part in many after-school activities when school finishes. Children do . 80. Lan is very good at basketball. Lan can . Unit 9: CITIES OF THE WORLD A. PHONETICS I. Put the words in the correct column according to the pronunciation of the underlined part. II. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. delicious B. like C. nice D. like 2. A. postcard B. home C. so D. come 3. A. show B. money C. robot D. motor 4. A. find B. design C. typical D. write 5. A. wish B. high C. price D. mind B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Fill in the tables with the appropriate words or phrases in the box. Cities Country Continent Places of interest New York

Rio de Janeiro

II. Give the opposite of the adjectives, and then fill the superlatives of the opposites into the blanks. 1. Sydney has beaches in the world. 2. Big Ben is bell ever made in England. 3. Sahara Desert is desert in the world. 4. Beijing is city in China. Smoke from factories causes thick, gray smog in the atmosphere. 5. The playwright William Shakespeare is British writer in the world. 6. Oxford University is university in Britain. 7. Melbourne in Australia is considered the world's city to live in. 8. London is city in the world. The prices are very high there. III. Tyler's friend, Mary, lives in San Francisco now. Complete the sentences about her new neighbourhood. Dear Tyler, San Francisco is great, but it's really noisy. My neighbourhood isn't noisy - it's nice and very (1) Across the street is a park. Next to my apartment is a big small with a lot of (2) . Behind the mall is a small store with cool things. My school is really nice. It's very old. But inside, the computers, desks and classrooms are (3) I'm really happy in San Francisco. But sometimes I'm (4) - I miss my friends a lot. Write soon! Mary IV. Complete the sentences with the verbs in the present perfect. 1. The longest book I is The Lord of the Rings. 2. She the USA three times. Her aunt lives there. 3. I that film. Is it good? 4. I lots of photos with my camera. 5. They German before. This is their first year. 6. My team ten matches this year. V. Put the verbs in brackets in the Present Perfect tense. 1. Peter and his brother (learn) English for three years. 2. Mr. Green (play) chess since eight o'clock. 3. It (not rain) since last week. 4. We (not see) our new teacher yet. 5. I (study) very hard for this examination. 6. My uncle (work) in this factory for ten years. 7. She (see) this film before. 8. The weather (be) quite good since Christmas. 9. I (have) this bike since I was a teenager, and I still use it. 10. He (play) for the football club for several years, but it's time to leave it now. VI. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct verb tense. 1. Be careful! The teacher (look) at you. 2. The boy (learn) for three years, but he can't understand this letter. 3. How long (you/know) Paul? - I (know) him for five years. 4. (she/feed) the cat yet? 5. We (not see) Lan since we (be) on holiday last summer. 6. (she/finish) her homework yet? 7. (your dog/ever bite) anyone? - Yes, he (bite) the postman last month. 8. Would you like some coffee? I (just/ make) some. 9. (you/ ever be) to Ha Noi? 10. Our school performance (start) late last Sunday because of the heavy rain. VII. Read the passage and find the superlative form of these adjectives. 1. cold the coldest 2. bad 3. low 4. wet 5. dry 6. difficult Antarctica is the coldest place in the world and it has the worst weather. The lowest temperature on record is -890C. Antarctica is also the wettest and the driest place in the world. How is this possible? It's the wettest place because 70 per cent of the world's fresh water is in Antarctica and 90 per cent of the world's ice. And it's the driest because in one place, the Dry Valleys, it never rains or snows. The Dry Valleys is the most difficult place in the world for plants and animals - nothing can live or grow there. VIII. Write sentences using comparative and superlative forms of the adjectives. Example: Nancy/ old/ Mary, but Sarah … Nancy is older than Mary, but Sarah is the oldest. 1. France/ hot/ Britain, but Spain … 2. Harry/ intelligent/ Paul, but Robert … 3. Magazines/ cheap/ books, but newspapers ... 4. History/ interesting/ science, but music … 5. Kate/ friendly/ Steve, but Wendy … IX. Complete the text with the correct form of the adjectives in brackets. One of the (1. nice) cities I know is Olomouc in the Czech Republic. The (2. good) thing about the city is that there aren't many tourists. The (3. busy) times are when people go to work and come home gain. The (4. famous) place in the Czech Republic is Prague. It is the (5. big) city and it is where most people go to. Olomouc is one of the (6. difficult) places to get to from Prague so people visit other towns and cities nearer to Prague. That's why it's one of the (7. quiet) cities in the country. What's the (8. bad) thing about it? It's one of the (9. expensive) cities in the country. C. SPEAKING I. Complete the following short exchanges with the correct verb tense. Then practise them with your partner. 1. A: Have you ever (try) spaghetti yet? B: No, I , but I'd like to. 2. A: Have you ever (eat) at a Japanese restaurant? B: Yes, I . The food was delicious. 3. A: Have you ever (see) a real tiger? B: Yes, I . I (see) one at the zoo last month. 4. A: Have you ever (be) to a picnic at the beach? B: Yes, I . It was fun. 5. A: (you/ have) breakfast this morning? B: Yes, I . I (eat) bread and eggs. II. What have you done today? Tick or cross the activities in the table. Example: "Have you taken a bus today?" - "Yes, I have./ No, I haven't." III. Work with a partner. Ask and answer the questions. Example: A: Have you met a famous person? B: Yes, I have. I've met…….. 1. watch/ a volleyball match? 2. win/ a competition? 3. see/ a play? 4. see/ an action film? 5. eat/ Chinese food? 6. meet/ a famous person? IV. Write questions, using the superlative form of the adjectives. Then give your opinion, and practise the conversations with your partners. Example: What/ beautiful/ place in the world? What is the most beautiful place in the world? I think … … is the most beautiful place in the world. 1. Who/ intelligent/ person in your family? 2. What popular/ food in our country? 3. Who/ famous/ actor in our country? 4. What/ important/ school subject? 5. What/ boring/ sport? D. READING I. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text. Tokyo, the capital of Japan, is a big city. The city is filled with factories, large office buildings. banks, restaurants, and shops of all sizes. It is a (1) for Japanese art, and is home to more than 100 colleges and universities. The city is (2) an important seaport. Most Japanese companies have (3) main offices in Tokyo. At the heart of Tokyo is the Imperial Palace. This is the place (4) the Emperor of Japan lives with his family. Tokyo is one of the world's biggest and most crowded (5) . 1. A. house B. city C. center D. capital 2. A. and B. also C. but D. so 3. A. its B. their C. theirs D. some 4. A. what B. where C. which D. for 5. A. city B. a city C. cities D. the cities II. Read the passage, and then choose the correct answers. San Francisco, a very hilly city, is in the San Francisco Bay. Although there are many modern skyscrapers in the city centre, houses in the suburbs are in the styles of the 19th century. The celebration of the Chinese New Year in San Francisco's Chinatown is one thing that you should not miss. You can find the best food from around the world: Brazilian, Indian, Japanese, Korean, Mexican, Russian, Thai, Chinese and much more. Don't forget to visit a jazz club or an outdoor coffee shop to enjoy good coffee and fresh air. You should visit Mission Dolores, an old church built by the Spanish in the 18th century. 1. Which of the following sentences is true about San Francisco? A. San Francisco is not a very hilly city. B. San Francisco is not in the San Francisco Bay. C. San Francisco has only old houses. D. San Francisco is a city with modern skyscrapers in the city centre. 2. What is second paragraph about? A. nightlife B. festivals C. scenery D. architecture 3. Where can we have coffee and enjoy fresh air? A. Chinatown B. Old houses C. Churches D. Outdoor coffee shops 4. Which of the following sentences is NOT true about San Francisco? A. San Francisco is in the San Francisco Bay. B. The celebration of the Chinese New Year in San Francisco's Chinatown is very interesting. C. You can only enjoy American and Chinese food in San Francisco. D. You should enjoy jazz at a jazz club in San Francisco. 5. By whom was Mission Dolores built in the 18th century? A. By people from Germany. B. By people from Spain. C. By people from Brazil. D. By people from Europe. III. Read the articles about the favourite Saturday activity of some students, and then answer the questions. A. Carlos - Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. Go to Ipanema Beach. Play volleyball or go swimming in the Atlantic Ocean. Look at the people. Everybody is happy. It's my favourite place. B. Michiko - Tokyo, Japan. Go to a department store in Shibuya. Shibuya is a great shopping area in Tokyo. Sometimes it's very crowded, but that's OK - I love shopping. C. Lise - Paris, France. Go to the Eiffel Tower. It's really tall. Look at the river and the beautiful buildings. The view of Paris is great. D. Jason - New York City, USA. Go to the skating rink in Central Park. Look at the ice-skaters. They're good! Or, go skating. It's really fun. 1. Is Shibuya in Paris? 2. Are the ice-skaters in Central Park good? 3. What is the name of Carlos's favourite place? 4. Is Michiko a shopping fan? 5. Where is Carlos from? 6. Is the Eiffel Tower in France? 7. Is Central Park in Tokyo? IV. Read the texts below and match them to the correct city and the state, writing the answer (A-D) in each blank. A. New York, New York State B. St. Louis, Missouri C. Pasadena, California D. Huntsville, Alabama 1. Hi. How's it going? My name's Joe. I live in Missouri. The Gateway Arch is in my state. It's 200 metres high. You can get an elevator to the top. It's amazing. 2. Hi, I'm Sarah. My favourite landmark is 443.5 metres high. It has 73 elevators and 6,500 windows. There is a fantastic view of the city from the top floor. Can you guess what it is? It's the Empire State Building, of course. 3. Hi, my name's Tania and I want to be an astronaut. I'm from Alabama so I often visit the Space and Rocket Centre here. My favourite landmark is the Apollo 11 Launch Vehicle. In 1969, Neil Armstrong travelled to the moon in Apollo 11. 4. Hi, my name's Mark. I'm a big football fan from California. My favourite landmark is the Pasadena Rose Bowl. Every year, they hold college football games here. V. Read the postcard and answer the questions. Dear Jack, Hi from New York! We got there after five-hour delay because we missed our flight in Washington. It is very cold, but we are doing a lot of sightseeing so that helps! Sometimes I'd prefer to stay in my hotel room, but you can't come to New York and stay inside! There's a little Italian place next to the hotel. We go there every morning for breakfast. Mum has a double espresso and a piece of cake and my dad has a full American breakfast. Ugggh! Far too much for me. I just have coffee! New York is wonderful - really! I love the skyscrapers! Hope you are well. Tom 1. Why did Tom get to New York five hours late? 2. What is the weather like? 3. Where do they have breakfast? 4. What does Tom have for breakfast? 5. What does Tom like about New York? VI. Match each text to the correct postcard. A. Come to Scotland B. A trip to London C. Normandy, France  Hi, Maria, We're having a great time. The weather here isn't nice, but the rest is really great. Tomorrow we're going to have a party with the boys from France on the beach, and on Friday we're going to go sightseeing. Are you going to see Marca on Saturday? If so, say hello to him from me. Love, Jenny  Hi Tom, I saw Brad Pitt yesterday. I know you're not going to believe me, but it's true. I read in the newspaper they're going to make a horror film here in Edinburgh, and he's in it. And guess what! I took a photo of him and I'm going to show it to you, because you never believe me! (I'm going to give it to Lisa!) See you soon! Roland Dear Sir, We're having a good time. Tomorrow we're going to visit the Tower and St Paul's, and in the evening we're going to see a play by Shakespeare. Dan says it's going to be very boring, but I don't think so. We like everything here - it's so English. Paolo and Gianni 1. What is Jenny going to do on Friday? 2. What is Brad Pitt doing in Edinburgh? 3. Why is Roland not going to show the photograph to Tom? 4. Who is he going to give the photograph to? 5. What are Paolo and Gianni going to see? 6. Who do you think they are writing to? VII. Read the passage and then answer the questions. Out and about in London 1. Museums and galleries. Visit Madame Tussauds and see models of the world's most famous people, including all your favourite actors and singers. There are some great museums. Don't miss Egyptian mummies at the British Museum or the dinosaurs at the Natural History Museum. Do you like modern? Then visit the Tate Modern with many modern collections of pictures and photos. 2. Interesting buildings The Tower of London is over 900 years old and for a long time it was a prison. After the Tower, take a boat trip down the river to St Paul's Cathedral, and then take a ride on the London Eye. There are fantastic views from the top. 3. Shopping There are lots of fantastic shops in London. Walk down Oxford Street, or visit one of the lively street markets, where everything is cheap! 4. Night life There are lots of exciting things to do in the evening. The West End is full of theatres, cinemas, and great restaurants. There are all kinds of concerts every night – rock, classical, pop, jazz... 5. Sport and leisure Relax and walk in Hype Park - it's clean and safe. Do you like football? Then go and see Chelsea play at Stamford Bridge. If you prefer tennis, there's Wimbledon in June. Where can you…. 1. relax and walk? 2. watch Chelsea play? 3. see models of famous people? 4. look at modern art? 5. watch tennis? 6. find lots of theatres? 7. find cheap things to buy? 8. enjoy wonderful views of the city? E. WRITING I. Read each postcard and then answer the questions for each. 1. Where are they? 2. What do they think of the place? 3. What is the weather like? 4. Where are they staying (hotel, campsite, etc.)? 5. What do they do every day? II. Write a postcard (50-70 words) to a friend. Use the writing guide to help you. Start with Dear… or Hi… Say where you are. Say what the place is like and what the weather is like. Say what type of housing you are staying in. Say what you do every day. Finish with Love or Bye for now and your name   TEST (UNIT 9) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. beach B. speak C. hear D. clean 2. A. city B. fish C. dish D. high 3. A. tower B. show C. slow D. motor 4. A. postcard B. fantastic C. visit D. fast 5. A. continent B. photo C. popular D. coffee II. Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. 6. A. peaceful B. beautiful C. noise D. delicious 7. A. Africa B. Sweden C. American D. Asia 8. A. clock B. tower C. bell D. lion 9. A. fantastic B. beautiful C. boring D. wonderful 10. A. tea B. fish and chips C. television D. sandwich III. Choose the correct answers. 11. Have you ever to London? A. be B. being C. been D. gone 12. People in Tokyo are very polite friendly. A. or B. and C. but D. so 13. Do you know drink in Viet Nam? A. popular B. more popular C. more and more popular D. the most popular 14. When we were in Stockholm, we had coffee and cakes a coffee shop the Old Town. A. on - on B. at - at C. in - in D. on - at 15. The Eiffel Tower is the most landmark in the world. A. visit B. . visiting C. visited D. to visit 16. Britain's most common activities are watching TV and films, and listening to the radio. A. free B. leisure C. good D. popular 17. "I have been to Nha Trang . How about you?" A. one B. two C. two times D. twice 18. Do you have in Da Lat during your holiday? A. time B. good time C. good a time D. a good time 19. Nha Trang has an atmosphere of a young, city. A. exciting - growing B. excited - grown C. exciting - grown D. excited - growing 20. That city is most famous its fashion shops. A. to B. with C. for D. of 21. My family had a lot of in Hoi An and it was an exciting trip. A. fun B. funny C. enjoy B D. enjoys 22. International School in Ho Chi Minh City is school in Viet Nam with high-tech facilities. A. the oldest B. the younger C. the most historic D. the most modern 23. Has our city been hot before? A. as this B. as this time C. like time D. like this time 24. People must be well-prepared they want to climb Mount Everest. A. after B. until C. although D. before 25. "Which is Britain in?" - "Europe" A. country B. continent C. city D. area 26. The red double-decker bus is London's famous . A. sign B. signal C. symbol D. logo 27. Nha Trang is also considered Viet Nam's seaside resort town. A. more famous B. most famous C. most visiting D. the most famous 28. I Da Lat three times in all. A. visit B. visited C. visiting D. have visited 29. This is the first time that I a 3D film. A. watch B. watched C. have ever watched D. have never watched 30. . I think it is a very nice town the weather is good and the people are friendly. A. because B. if C. so D. although IV. Complete the sentences, using the present perfect form of the verbs. Example: "Is David still here?" - "No, he (go) has gone home." 31. "Is it raining?" - "No, it (stop) ." 32. "Are Mary and Susan here?" - "Yes, they (arrive) ." 33. "Do you want a drink?" - "No, thanks. I (have) one." 34. "Does Kate bring her cellphone with her?" - "Yes, I (speak) to her." 35. "Is Daniel watching TV?" - "No, he (finish) ." V. Match the questions with the answers, and write the answer in each blank. Questions Answers 36. What is the weather in Nha Trang like? a) They are very friendly. 37. What do you think about the local people? b) I think they are the same. 38. What have Nam and Hoa done? c) She'll visit the Big Ben. 39. What will Mai do tomorrow? d) The sun is shining all the time. 40. Is the weather here hotter than in Singapore? e) They have visited the Old Quarter. VI. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text. Sydney is the (41) of the state New South Wales in Australia. It is the largest, oldest, and perhaps the (42) beautiful city in Australia. Sydney has a population of 4.5 million. Its Harbour is one of the largest in the world, and famous (43) the Harbour Bridge and the Opera House. The streets in the city centre are narrow (44) many art galleries, restaurants, pubs, but the streets in Paddington are (45) and houses are big. 1. A. home B. site C. capital D. village 2. A. more B. most C. less D. fewer 3. A. with B. for C. in D. at 4. A. on B. at C. to D. with 5. A. narrow B. short C. long D. wide VII. Read the passage, and then choose the correct answers. Tokyo is the capital of Japan. In Tokyo, there are always too many people in the place where you want to come. People are very polite even when they often spend a long time on traffic jams. Tokyo is different from London when you want to walk to a place. During the day, most people travel to work by train. Tokyo people buy six million train tickets every day. Although they are usually crowded, Japanese trains are very good. They always leave and arrive on time. On a London train, everybody in a seat seems to be asleep whether the journey is long or short. The worst time to be in the street at night is about 11.30 when the nightclubs are closing and everybody wants to go home. 46. Tokyo is different from London because . A. it has a larger population B. it is a noisy city C. it is more difficult to walk to somewhere D. its people are friendly and more polite 47. When does the writer think the worst time to go into the street? A. When the nightclubs are closing. B. At 8.00 am. C. When the trains are full. D. At 11.30 am 48. What does the writer think of Japanese trains? A. They are very nice and comfortable. B. There are not enough trains. C. They often run late. D. They leave and arrive on time. 49. In London trains, every British in a seat . A. reads a newspaper B. looks like being asleep C. talks with other people D. looks out of the window. 50. Which statement is NOT true according to the passage? A. Most people in Tokyo travel to work by train. B. It is very difficult to go around in Tokyo. C. When Japanese people are on traffic jams, they are not polite. D. Trains in Tokyo are very good - they always leave and arrive on time. VIII. Make questions for the underlined part in each sentence. 51. London is on the River Thames. 52. The Eiffel Tower first opened on 6th May 1889. 53. We are going to visit the Empire State Building tomorrow. 54. I went to London in my last vacation. 55. The weather in London was very cloudy and wind. IX. There is ONE mistake in each sentence, try to find the mistake and correct it. 56. The Royal Palace is one of the largest palace in Europe. 57. "Have you ever eat Ha Noi Pho, Steven?" 58. Up to now, I have visited Da Lat third times. 59. Do you think the most popular Vietnamese writer of children is To Hoai? 60. Sydney Opera House is an UNESCO World Heritage building. 61. The Merlion is a creature with the head of a lion so the body of a fish. 62. New York is an excited city with many skyscrapers. 63. You can play boating on the West Lake and it is very nice. 64. I have been to the beaches in Nha Trang many time with my family. 65. Is Chicago or Los Angeles the two biggest city in the United States? X. Put the words in the correct order. 66. from/ vacation/ come/ Nha Trang/ I/ just have/ a/ back/ in. 67. university/ Viet Nam/ the/ was/ Quoc Tu Giam/ first/ in. 68. world/ six/ in/ are/ continents/ there/ the. 69. England/ tower/ it/ famous/ in/ the/ is/ most. 70. years/ new/ building/ is/ but/ looks/ 100/ more than/ old/ the/ it. XI. Write correct sentences, using the words or phrases given. 71. Da Nang/ attract/ lots/ tourists/ because/ it/ most beautiful/ beaches/ Viet Nam. 72. Hoi An/ famous/ old houses and buildings/ traditional crafts. 73. You/ see/ latest Batman film? 74. Temple of Literature/ one/ Ha Noi's/ famous/ landmarks. 75. Merlion/ lion's head/ fish's body/ symbol/ Singapore. XII. Rewrite the following sentences, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same. 76. In Viet Nam, April is hotter than any other months of the year. In Viet Nam, April is . 77. Do you think money is more important than any other things in the world? Do you think money is . 78. My father thinks Brazil has a football team better than any other football teams in the world. My father thinks Brazil has . 79. New York is more exciting than any other cities in the world. New York is . 80. Nha Trang attracts lots of tourists. It has clean and beautiful beaches. Because .   TEST YOURSELF 3 I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. with B. breathe C. they D. truth 2. A. show B. snow C. now D. slow 3. A. care B. share C. prepare D. career 4. A. fear B. near C. hear D. bear 5. A. like B. bit C. bite D. kind II. Choose the correct answers. 6. I often fishing with my uncle at the weekend. A. do B. go C. play D. make 7. Our hometown is beautiful place in the world. A. more B. more and more C. the most D. the more and more 8. The atmosphere is getting more because there is more smoke from factories and motor engines. A. pollute B. polluting C. polluted D. pollution 9. " is the longest river in the world?" - "I think it's the Nile River." A. Which B. Where C. How D. Why 10. "I have been to Singapore . How about you?" A. two B. two times C. twice D. twice times 11. doing morning exercises is good for your health, don't do it too hard. A. Although B. If C. But D. When 12. The drink in Viet Nam is tea. A. more popular B. more and more popular C. delicious D. most popular 13. I have been many beautiful places in Viet Nam. A. at B. on C. in D. to 14. I first to Ha Noi in 2010. A. was B. went C. have been D. have gone 15. "I'd like to change the . Please give me the remote control." A. programme B. view C. channel D. television 16. If you want to know which film is on tonight, check the TV . A. programme B. schedule C. news D. information 17. Most children like because they make them laugh a lot. A. films B. love stories C. comedies D. documentaries 18. Let's Learn is a TV programme for small children which makes education . A. fun B. funny C. enjoy D. enjoyed 19. Watching too much TV is not good for your health it hurts your eyes. A. so B. but C. and D. because 20. "Do you your TV on when you are not watching it? " A. take B. leave C. get D. make 21. "It's cold outside. Remember to warm clothes." A. wear B. put off C. put D. get 22. are the Olympic Games held? A. How B. How long C. How often D. How much 23. "Do you to any school clubs, Nam?" A. belong B. play C. do D. going III. Complete the story with the Past Simple form of the verbs in brackets. It (24. be) a sunny day. Helen (25. walk) to the park. In the park she (26. phone) her friend Daisy. Helen (27. wait) for 15 minutes and Daisy (28. arrive) . The girls (29. walk) to the river. There (30. be) two boys there. Suddenly the big boy (31. push) the small boy into the river. Helen (32. jump) into the river to rescue the boy. Daisy (33. phone) the ambulance and the police. The doctors and police (34. arrive) . They (35. interview) the girls. IV. Complete the dialogue with the Present Perfect or the Simple Past of the verbs in brackets. Minh: I (36. just, hear) that Hung is in Australia. Mai: Oh, (37. You/ not know) that? He (38. fly) there at the beginning of the month. Minh: (39. you/ hear) from him? Does he like the life there? Mai: Yes, I (40. get) a letter last week. He (41. tell) me about his study. But he (42. not say) whether he (43. like) the life or not. Perhaps it's too early to say. He (44. be) there for only three weeks. He (45. never/ be) to a foreign country before. V. Complete the dialogue. Use the correct form of the verbs in brackets. Nam: Hi My name's Nam. Peter: Hello. Nice to meet you, Nam. I'm Peter. Nam: Are you a newcomer here? Peter: Yes. I (46. be) here since last week. Nam: I'm sure you'll love this place. Peter: I (47. hope) so. How long (48. you/ live) here? Nam: For 15 years. Peter: So you must know the area very well. (49. be) there a post office near here? Nam: Yes. There (50. be) one next to my house. Why? Peter: Because I (51. want) to send this postcard to my family. Nam: Oh! It (52. look) very beautiful. Where (53. be) your family? Peter: In London. (54. you/ ever be) there, Nam? Nam: Not yet. But I (55. go) there with my father next summer holiday. Peter: That's great. I hope to see you again there. VI. Match the questions with the answers, and write the answer in each blank. Questions Answers

56. What's your favorite program? 57. Why don't you watch some news programs? 58. What about plays? 59. Was there anything good on TV last night? 60. What was it about? 61. What was so special about it? 62. Really? What time was it on? 63. I'm sorry I missed it. Is there another chance to see it? 64. Which program do you prefer, the news or the film show? 65. What would you like to watch on TV? a. Because they're usually boring. b. Film shows. c. From seven to eight. d. Yes, it's going to be shown again. e. Yes, there was an interesting nature program. f. The news and the sports shows. g. I don't care about them either. h. It was about monkeys and the way they live. i. Oh, the film show, not the news. j. It was so interesting and the pictures .

VII. Read the passage, and then decide whether the sentences are True or False. When Ana lived in Brazil, she joined a riding club. It was brilliant! She learned how to ride and how to look after a horse. Now she lives in the US and there isn't a club in her village but it isn't a problem. Her friend lives on a farm and she has two horses, so twice a week (Wednesdays and Fridays) after school she goes there to ride with her friend. Ana thinks she's lucky! 66. Ana learned to ride in the US. 67. She also learned how to take care of horses. 68. The village in the US where she lives does not have a riding club. 69. Ana lives on a farm. 70. Ana rides horses at the weekend. VIII. Read the text, and answer the questions below. In the 1970s, skateboarding suddenly became very popular. At first, skateboarders move slowly on flat, smooth area. Then they began to ride quickly. This is called 'freestyle' skateboarding. Soon they were skateboarding skillfully up ramps and doing tricks in the air. This is called 'ramp' skateboarding. Then they started skateboarding and doing tricks on the street. This was 'street-style' skateboarding – a combination of freestyle and ramp. For this, the skateboarders needed protective clothing such as knee and elbow pads and helmets. This allowed them to skateboard safely. Today skateboarding is still a very popular sport, and there are lots of competitions 71. When did skateboarding become very popular? 72. What are the three styles of skateboarding? 73. What was 'street-style' skateboarding? 74. Why do 'street-style' skateboarders need protective clothing? 75. Do you think skateboarding is a very popular sport now? Why or why not? IX. Write correct sentences, using the words or phrases given. 76. I/ take part/ swimming competition/ school/ last week/ and/ win/ third prize. 77. I/ can't/ soccer /classmates/ this afternoon/ because/ I/ visit/ my grandmother/ hospital. 78. I/ should/ finish/ homework/ before/ play/ sports. 80. Soccer/ or football/ most/ popular sport/ Viet Nam.   Unit 10: OUR HOUSES IN THE FUTURE A. PHONETICS Complete the words with the letters "dr" or "tr". Put the words in the correct column. ess s ess chil en actor avel ain aw eam ousers ee ip iver coun yside aw y ink lamp B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR I. Fill in each blank with a suitable phrase from the box. 1. We will use a to wash all the dishes and containers after a meal. 2. A will wash dirty clothes and make them ready for you to put on. 3. will understand what we say and will do all things around the house. 4. We will watch TV programmes from other countries by using . 5. Do you think will choose suitable food for our meals? II. Complete the sentences with the verbs from the box in the correct form with "will". In the year 2040… l. people on Mars. 2. we flying cars. 3. people computers in their clothes. 4. robots all our homework. 5. families food in their homes. 6. the world a clean and happy place. 7. we every language in the world by using special computers. 8. the USA the football World Cup. 9. young people to strange music. 10. some people to the Moon for their holidays. III. Complete the sentences. The first has been done for you as an example. Example: A: In 20 years' time, I'll have a big house. (No, palace.) B: No, you won't. You'll have a palace! 1. A: In ten years' time, you'll be my assistant. (No, manager.) B: 2. A: In five years time, I'll be a poor artist. (No, rich and famous.) B: 3. A: Jack will pass all his exams this year. (No, most of) B: 4. A: Peter will play for England one day. (No, Wales) B: 5. A: In 50 years, this school will have 2,000 students. (No, everyone will study at home.) B: IV. Write a question with "will" for each situation, using the words given in brackets. Example: I will paint something this afternoon. (What/ you/ paint?) What will you paint this afternoon? 1. Mrs. Roberts will go shopping. (What/ she/ buy?) 2. They are meeting Paul at the station. (When/ he/ arrive?) 3. We won't have a meeting on Thursday. (When/ you/ have a meeting?) 4. We will go to the cinema. (What/ you/ see?) 5. My grandparents will go to Ha Noi this summer. (How/ they/ travel?) 6. I have just bought some posters. (Where/ you/ put them?) 7. My grandparents will come for dinner tonight. (What/ you/ cook?) 8. My brother will learn a foreign language. (What language/ he learn?) 9. It's my birthday next week. (Where/ you/ have/ birthday's party?) 10. I am too busy to paint the door. (When/ you/ paint/it?) V. Complete the sentences with might or might not. 1. I'm tired. I go to bed early tonight. 2. He left the office very late so he be home for dinner. 3. There are a lot of clouds in the sky so it rain later. 4. She didn't pass her driving test so she be happy. 5. They're a very good team. They win the championship this year. VI. Match the two halves of the sentence. Write the answers in the left blanks. 1. It might rain a. and I might say 'yes'. 2. I have a headache b. so I might not eat anything. 3. I need a new dress c. so I might not go to the party. 4. I quite like Kaiser Chiefs d. so I might go shopping tomorrow. 5. I drank a lot of coffee this morning e. so take a coat. 6. I don't feel very hungry f. and I might not want to see it again. 7. I've seen this film g. and I might buy their new CD. 8. He asked me to marry him h. so I might not sleep well tonight. VII. Choose the correct word. 1. I'll leave early so will/ won't be late. 2. He's faster than me so I don't think I will/ won 't win the race. 3. It will/ won't be cold so take a warm coat. 4. It's a secret so promise you will/ won't tell anyone. 5. It's his first day at school so he will/ won't know anybody. 6. I'll get the news tomorrow so I will/ won't phone and tell you. 7. She's intelligent. She will/ won't be a scientist one day. 8. The sky's really blue so I don't think it will/ won't rain this afternoon. C. SPEAKING Complete the conversation with suitable phrases. A: Will you live in a hi-tech house? B: Yes, I think so. A: (1) our houses in the future? B: I think they will be (2) . A: Is it friendly to the environment? B: Yes, that's right. It will only use (3) so that we can keep the environment clean. A: What about the appliances? B: The Internet TV helps us to watch(4) . A: Will you have any robots in your house? B: Well, Robots will (5) , so we will have more time for our family and relax. D. READING I. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text. Our future house will be on the ocean. It will be surrounded by tall trees and blue sea. But we only have salt water in the ocean. We needs fresh water for (l) and for growing food (2) farms. Ocean water is too salty (3) . It is also too salty for watering plants. We must have the (4) to make fresh water from salty water. We should be (5) not to waste water. 1. A. drink B. to drink C. drinking D. to drinking 2. A. on B. at C. in D. into 3. A. drink B. to drink C. drinking D. for drink 4. A. things B. suggestions C. ways D. ideas 5. A. careful B. careless C. carefully D. carelessly II. Read the passage carefully, and then choose the correct answers. MY DREAM SCHOOL In the future, schools will be better. Computers will be much quicker and we might have pencils which write for us! All the students will have their own computers. When there is a history lesson, the computers will show important events. The students will be dressed up as the characters from the period they are studying. There will be hover boards in the playground, and students will come to school by hover cars. Every child will have a robot like themselves. The robots will have to go to school while the students sit at home controlling them in front of their computers. The robots will have laser pens and the student will have laser ink pens. The classroom will be floating, and the tables and chairs will, too. There will be no homework, and teachers won't take away the toys. 1. The student wants all of the following but not . A. having laser ink pens B. going to school C. staying at home controlling a robot D. having a robot like himself 2. In history lessons, the student wants the computer to . A. show important people in history events B. have new games C. show history events and the student will be one of the important characters D. find all information about the events from the Internet 3. If the history lesson today is about ancient Egypt, the student will . A. watch films about Egypt on the computer B. become the queen C. get dressed like the queen D. see things and houses at that time 4. The student wants to have . A. floating classrooms B. no homework C. toys in the classroom D. all A, B, and C 5. The word "hover" in paragraph 2 means . A. colourful B. flying C. moving D. large III. Read the text and match the machines (1-6) with the things they do (a-i). Three machines match with two things. My dream smart home … The bedroom: When I go to bed, the smart bed automatically gets warm. When I am asleep, it controls the temperature. In the morning, when I wake up, my robots makes me a cup of tea. I drink the tea in bed and then get up. The bathroom has a smart shower. When my sister is in the shower, it stops after five minutes and says to her, "Your brother wants to use the bathroom now." The smart mirror says nice things to me like, "Your hair is great today!" The kitchen has a smart fridge. It orders food from the Internet. My smart fridge orders food for all my family and it knows our favourite food. It talks to my family. It says, "Don't eat that, it's John's!" The living room: The smart TV knows what I like and it finds things that I want to watch. It doesn't listen to other people. My smart robot: My smart robot looks after the dog. It gives him food and it takes him out for exercise. 1. Smart bed a. It orders our food. 2. Smart mirror b. It speaks to my sister 3. Smart shower c. It looks after my dog. 4. Smart fridge d. It controls the temperature 5. Smart TV e. It speaks to me. 6. Smart robot f. It stops after five minutes. g. It doesn't listen to other people. h. It makes me a cup of tea. i. It speaks to my family. IV. Read the text, and then answer the questions. Imagine the future... In 20 years, every thing will be different. Computers will talk to all the machines in our kitchen. Fridges will have computers, too. You won't go to the supermarket to buy food. You will tell the fridge what you want to eat and the fridge will know what food to buy. Your fridge will talk to the computer at the supermarket. After that, the food will arrive at your house. How will it come? It won't be quick. A teenager will cycle to your house with your food! Will you know what will happen in the future? No one really knows, but it's great to imagine! 1. When will everything be different? 2. What will computers do in the kitchen? 3. What will fridges have in the future? 4. Why don't we need to go to the supermarket to get food? 5. How can food arrive at our house? E. WRITING Write sentences with "will", using the words or phrases given. l. Students/ class 6A/ plant/ some trees/ school yard/ tomorrow morning. 2. Tourists/ stop/ restaurant/ a short time. 3. My children/ spend/ their holiday/ a farm. 4. My mother/ prepare/ food/ my birthday party/ next week. 5. Hoa/ see/ her parents/ the country. 6. They/ have/ an important test/ Friday. 7. Workers/ build/ more bridges/ this area. 8. They/ travel/ Ha Noi/ by air. 9. They/ cut down/ some trees/ schoolyard. 10. It/ rain/ soon.   TEST (UNIT 10) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. living B. wireless C. hi-tech D. nice 2. A. robot B. go C. no D. not 3. A. space B. located C. lake D. cottage 4. A. machine B. cheap C. watch D. children 5. A. surround B. ocean C. space D. house II. Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. 6. A. palace B. houseboat C. motorhome D. kitchen 7. A. control B. start C. run D. engine 8. A. telephone B. robot C. dishwasher D. travel 9. A. surf B. Internet C. email D. sea 10. A. fantastic B. exciting C. interesting D. boring III. Choose the correct answers. 11. Super cars will water in the future. A. go by B. run at C. run on D. travel by 12. The robot will of the flowers in the garden. A. take care B. take note C. be careful D. carry 13. The house will have a super smart TV to the e-mails. A. send and post B. . send and receive C. get and take D. receive and get 14. pencils and paper, every student will have a computer . A. By B. Instead C. Instead of D. At 15. We might have a TV to watch TV programmes from space. A. wireless B. remote C. automatic D. local 16. I would like to have my house by . so we can see the beach from my window A. the mountains B. the city C. the sea D. the countryside 17. A hi-tech robot will help us children while we are away. A. look out B. look at C. look after D. look in 18. We might have robots our meals. A. cook B. to cook C. cooking D. to cooking 19. I might have a smart phone the Internet. A. surf B. to surf C. surfing D. to surfing 20. We also watch films smart phones. A. in B. at C. on D. to 21. "Do you think we will holiday to the Moon?" A. go B. go on C. go on the D. go for 22. "Will you have a car can fly into space?" A. it B. this C. what D. that 23. We will use special cards to the doors and the engine. A. open - stop B. open - start C. control - stop D. drive - start 24. "Do you think that our houses will be space?" A. in B. on C. at D. to 25. Our future houses will use energy, and they are very friendly to the environment. A. sun B. sunny C. solar D. lunar 26. We will have more robots they can help us do housework and protect our houses. A. so B. because C. so that D. although 27. A super smart TV will help us goods from the supermarket. A. take B. buy C. carry D. order 28. We will have a robot in the garden the flowers and the dogs and cats. A. cut - take B. water - feed C. feed - take D. water - to wash 29. With a smart watch, you will your friends in other countries. A. speak B. talk C. say D. contact 30. Robots will help us do the housework such as the floors, meals and so on. A. clean - cook B. to clean - to cook C. cleaning - cooking D. cleaning - to cook IV. Fill in each blank with ONE word. 31. My future house will have a sea so we can see the beach from my window. 32. "Can you tell me about your house in the future?" 33. My future house will be on the sea, and we can use and energy. 34. "Where will your future house ?" 35. Instead of taking pictures with our cameras, we will take pictures with our . 36. "Will you have a lot of trees and flowers your house?" 37. A wireless TV will help us watch TV from space. 38. Our future house should produce all of the energy it . 39. People might watch films smart phones. 40. We can change the rooms very quickly so that we can new technology. V. Complete the following sentences with "will", using the verbs given in the box. 41. I some close friends to my birthday party. 42. We a play at the ABC Theater. 43. He chess in the Youth Club. 44. Tom some bread at the baker's. 45. I some books from the library. 46. She a letter to her friend. 47. We our grandparents next weekend. 48. They their children toys at Christmas. 49. They their holiday in Vung Tau. 50. She a blue dress at her sister's wedding. VI. Complete the conversation with appropriate words or phrases. A Which type of house would you like (51) in the future? B Well, maybe a hi-tech house on the ocean. It will be (52) by tall trees and blue sea. A How can you produce electricity? B We can produce all the energy because we can use (53) . A It will be very friendly to the environment. How can you go to school? B There will be a helicopter on the roof so that (54) . A Can you control your house when you're away? B Yes, we can have our smart phones (55) our cooker, and robots (56) such as cleaning the floors, watering the flowers, and so on. A How about entertainment? B I think we will have a home theater so that we can (57) , or even play sports with your virtual friends. A Will your father have to go to work? B I don't think so. People can have offices at home so that they (58) from home. They can use (59) to contact their manager. A And do you think we will live (60) planets in the future? B Everything can happen, but maybe it will be very different. VII. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each of the gaps to complete the following text. When life changes so fast, the family life will change, too. So what will a family be (61) after a hundred years? We can't have the correct answers. Parents will have (62) babies. They can even choose their child's hair or eye colour. The mother will be busy but she will get help (63) some friendly house robots. When the family go out together, they will travel on flying cars. These cars will be much faster and there will be no traffic jams (64) each flying car can have its own way. There will be love and (65) between the family members. 61. A. enjoy B. like C. as D. so 62. A. healthier B. healthiest C. health D. healthful 63. A. with B. of C. at D. from 64. A. so B. because C. although D. but 65. A. care B. careful C. careless D. carefully VIII. Read the passage carefully, and then choose the correct answers. In the future, people will build houses on the moon. The best place for houses in a moon town will be underground. Underground houses will be safe, and the temperatures will not be very high during daytime and not very low at night. Moon homes may be balloons with oxygen, and people will wear oxygen masks when they are away from home because the moon has no air around it. The house might have beds, tables, and chairs, so people will sleep, eat, and work in their home. Moon-house building will be easy. 66. In a moon town, what is the best place for house? A. a balloon B. on the ground C. underground D. in the air 67. Which of the following is true? A. The people on the moon will not leave their homes. B. The people on the moon will wear oxygen masks when they leave their homes. C. The moon homes are very hot during daytime. D. The temperatures will be very high during daytime and very low at night. 68. Why do people need oxygen when they stay on the moon? A. Because the moon is too large. B. Because the moon houses are full of air. C. Because people sleep, eat, and work outside their houses. D. Because the moon has no air. 69. How comfortable are the houses on the moon? A. They have furniture for people to sleep, eat, or work. B. They have many balloons. C. They don't have any furniture. D. They have all kinds of furniture. 70. In the writer's opinion, will people build houses on the moon? A. No, they can't. B. They might not do it. C. Of course, they will. D. People only think so. IX. Write the sentences with "will", using the words/ phrases given. 71. My mother/ make/ a big meal/ tonight. 72. I/ finish/ work/ 6 p.m. 73. I/ not have/ a birthday party/ this year. 74. You/ meet/ Lan/ tonight? 75. We/ take/ our cousins/ holiday/ us. 76. My friends/ not come/ tonight. 77. He/ catch/ the train/ London/ 9 o'clock. 78. I/ not come/ class/ tomorrow. 79. My grandmother/ visit/ us/ Saturday. 80. You/ stay/ home/ this weekend?   Unit 11: OUR GREENER WORLD A. PHONETICS I. Put the words in the correct column according to the pronunciation of the underlined part. II. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. stand B. hand C. father D. apple 2. A. yard B. activity C. had D. automatic 3. A. bad B. cat C. bag D. calm 4. A. cameras B. fantastic C. part D. fact 5. A. dark B. travel C. cancel D. action B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR Reduce Reuse Recycle …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… …………………………………… I. Put the words from the box into the correct column. One word can belong to more than one group. II. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb. 1. If we win the money, we (buy) a new house. 2. We (go) on holiday if there is time . 3. If we (need) some help, we'll ask. 4. She (not write) to you if she leaves. 5. If Harry stays with his grandparents, Sally (not be) happy. 6. We (do) this for you if you want. III. Choose the correct word. 1. If we miss/ will miss the bus, we take/ will take the taxi. 2. If you don't eat/ won't eat fruit, you get/ will get a cold. 3. If you help/ will help me, I lend/ will lend you that Beyoncé CD. 4. If he doesn't stop/ won't stop smoking, he has/ will have problems later. 5. You are/ will be on time if you run/ will run. 6. She goes/ will go to the party if you invite/ will invite her. 7. They see/ will see the new Lara Croft film if they go/ will go to the cinema. 8. I come/ will come over to your house if you rent/ will rent a DVD. IV. Match the phrases to form a sentence in the first conditional, and write the answer in each blank. 1. If you wear that shirt a. it'll bite you 2. If you invite her to the cinema b. will you be at home? 3. If you touch that dog c. he'll have an accident. 4. If it's hot tomorrow d. we'll be home by ten. 5. If I phone you at nine e. you'll look really good. 6. If he drives that car fast f. will you buy some chocolate for me? 7. If we leave now g. we'll go to the beach. 8. If I give you some money h. I'm sure she'll say yes C. SPEAKING I. Complete the dialogue with the expressions in the box. Miss Hanh: Oh, don't throw away that plastic bottle. (1) . Lan: An old plastic bottle? (2) . Miss Hanh: To save water, you put some small stones in the bottle and (3) . The stones and water make the bottle heavy (4) , oh in the toilet tank. Lan: You put it in the toilet tank? Miss Hanh: Yeah, (5) every time you empty the tank. (6) . Lan: It saves that much water? Wow! II. Ask and answer the questions. Use the phrases given or your own answers. 1. What do you recycle? - I recycle . (plastic bottles/ metal cans/ glass jars/ newspapers/ juice cartons) 2. What do you think about the recycled items? – I think they are . (cool/ fashionable/ colourful/ fun) 3. Have you ever made anything from your old things? - . (Yes, I have./ No, I haven't.) 4. What did you make? - I made a . (bag/ pencil case/ greeting card/ gift box/ picture) 5. What did you use? - I used some old . (clothes/ cardboard/ paper/ ribbon/ plastic/ magazines) D. READING I. Complete the passage with the words given in the box. Ba's class has a (1) on waste paper. His friends are so (2) to learn that every day throughout the world, millions of newspapers and paper bags are (3) away. People are collecting waste paper and (4) it. Making paper (5) a lot of trees and labor. Now if people don't (6) paper, they can save (7) and money. Especially, people can save the natural (8) . For every (9) of recycled newsprint, ten trees can be saved. The more paper people save, the more natural resources are (10) . II. Read the text. Each of the sentences has one mistake, and try to correct the mistakes. An Eco Home John Kangister and his wife, Kathy live in an interesting house. It's an eco home. Eco homes don't harm the environment. They don't use coal or oil, so they don't produce dangerous gases. John and Kathy's eco home is in California, USA. It looks like a house from one of The Lord of the Rings films. Most of the house is underground. The house was very cheap to build. It has wooden walls, and floors. The windows are recycled glass. There are solar panels to make electricity for the lights, DVD players, and computers. John and Kathy get water from a well and they grow vegetables in the mud on top of the house. Now John and Kathy don't want to live anywhere else. They love their home because it helps the planet greener and it looks fantastic. They think that eco homes are a great idea for everyone. 1. Eco homes don't produce dangerous chemicals. 2. Eco homes don't use electricity. 3. The house was expensive to build. 4. The eco home has stone floors. 5. John and Kathy grow flowers on top of the house. III. Read the passage carefully, and then answer the questions. Getting back to nature The Little Morocco is a beautiful building. We used stone and mud to build the hotel. There are skylights - windows in roof to let light in - so we save electricity. The skylights give us light in the day, we don't use electric lights. We don't use chemicals to clean the rooms because we don't want to damage the environment. You can walk in the mountains near the hotel and see lots of local wildlife. Enjoy a boat trip on the lake and see the amazing waterfalls. or visit the beautiful caves. 1. What did they use to build the house? 2. How can the skylights help us to save electricity? 3. Why don't they use chemicals to clean the rooms? 4. What can you see in the mountains? 5. What are the activities for a boat trip? E. WRITING Answer A B

1. If we plant more trees 2. If we borrow books from the library instead of buying 3. If we have a shower instead of a bath 4. If people use more cars 5. If the soil is polluted A. we will save a lot of water. B. they will make the air more polluted.

C. we will have more oxygen to breathe. D. the plants will die. E. we save our money. I. Match each part in A with the corresponding in B, writing the answer in each blank. II. Make the first conditional sentences, using the words and phrases given. 1. If/ we/ plant/ more trees/ neighbourhood/ greener. 2. If/ we/ cycle/ school/ every day/ we/ keep/ air/ clean and fresh. 3. If/ we/ keep/ hunt/ animals/ they/ disappear/ soon. 4. If/ we/ cut down/ all/ trees/ there/ floods. 5. If/ we/ use/ buses /we/ reduce/ pollution.   TEST (UNIT 11) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. can B. star C. bag D. that 2. A. far B. plant C. plan D. hat 3. A. plastic B. start C. stand D. land 4. A. smart B. channel C. cancer D. thanks 5. A. cart B. heart C. card D. animal II. Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. 6. A. plastic B. glass C. metal D. bag 7. A. reduce B. repeat C. reuse D. recycle 8. A. bottle B. bag C. bin D. paper 9. A. refillable B. reusable C. recycled D. repair 10. A. floods B. rubbish C. litter D. garbage III. Choose the correct answers. of trees. 11. If we waste paper, we will save a lot of trees. A. repeat B. recycle C. rewrite D. remake 12. If we plant more trees in the schoolyard, the school will become a place. A. greener B. darker C. dirtier D. more polluted 13. "Why do you often forget to the lights when you go out of the classroom?" A. turn on B. turn off C. close D. shut down 14. "What can we do air pollution?" A. reduce B. to reduce C. reducing D. to reducing 15. You can save money while shopping by only buying you need. A. what B. it C. this D. that 16. "Reduce, reuse, recycle" is said to encourage people to waste less, by using less and using things again, in order to the environment . A. harm B. damage C. pollute D. protect 17. Please collect all the recyclable materials, and take them to the factory. A. recycle B. recycled C. recyclable D. recycling 18. This newspaper is made of paper. A. recycle B. recycled C. old D. waste 19. If we all use bags, we'll help the environment. A. new B. cheap C. reusable D. reduced 20. These three Rs . reduce, reuse, and recycle A. stand up B. stand for C. ask for D. means 21. If there is a rubbish bin in every class, the classroom will become . A. harmful B. lighter C. dirtier D. cleaner 22. "Don't throw rubbish into the river because you will make it ." A. greener B. dirty C. cleaner D. fresher 23. If we use paper, we will save a lot of trees. A. fewer B. less C. more D. much 24. You should put the food in a reusable box plastic bag. A. by B. instead of C. because of D. without 25. If people turn off all electric appliances in one hour all over the world, they can save lots of . A. electric B. electrical C. electrician D. electricity 26. It is a good idea to our clothes with our friends or cousins. A. change B. swap C. turn D. send 27. Next week our class is having a discussion about finding ways to reuse old items before throwing them away. A. interested B. surprising C. useless D. creative 28. If you have old clothes, will you give them to those ? A. needs B. to need C. for needing D. in need 29. My brother and I will give last year's clothes to instead of throwing them away. A. shop B. people C. charity D survey. 30. "Do you think we should put a bin in every classroom in order to keep it clean?" A. reusable B. recycled C. recycling D. recyclable IV. Fill in each blank with ONE correct word. 31. is the act of cutting down or burning the trees in an area. 32. is the act of using rubbish to remake new things that can be sold again. 33. We should turn off all the lights and fans before we the classroom. 34. If we breathe air, we will have breathing problems. 35. You can take these bottles to the factory to them. 36. If we turn off the lights when we are not using them, we will save a lot of . 37. If we recycle old newspapers, we will a lot of trees. 38. If we walk or cycle to school, we will improve our health and air pollution. 39. Recycling starts when we put rubbish such as empty bottles and cans in the recycling . 40. When you go to the supermarket, you should before you buy in order not to buy things you don't need later. V. Write conditional sentences from these statements. 41. We will plant more trees. The air will be fresher. If 42. We will use fewer cars. We will reduce pollution. If . 43. We will cycle to school every day. We will keep fitter. If . 44. We will use recycled products. We will save money. If . 45. People will throw rubbish into the right bin. They will keep the environment clean. If . 46. We will turn off the tap when brushing the teeth. We will save a lot of water. If . 47. People will travel more by public transport. The harmful gases in big cities will be reduced. If . 48. We will start at 6.00. We will arrive there before noon. If . 49. The boy eats so may green apples. He will be ill. If . 50. We will use reusable bags for shopping. We will reduce waste. If . VI. Rearrange the sentences to make a meaningful conversation. Jack Can my sister and I come with you? We have lots of garbage, too. Ann: Sure. We're leaving at two o'clock. Let's meet outside your house. Jack: What are you doing this afternoon? Jack: It's OK. See you then. Ann: Dad and I are taking all our garbage to the recycling center. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. VII. Fill in each blank of the conversation with ONE word. Jack Don't worry. We can help you clean up. Linda We'll need (56) people. I'm (57) our friends and families. Soon... Linda Thanks for (58) , everyone. We pick up all the litter and (59) it. There are bags here (60) plastic, metal, paper, and glass. Daisy Batteries are dangerous. They have (61) inside them. They can kill birds and fish. Linda That's really sad. Jack Look, everyone. The river is black and dirty, but it will be clean soon. That's the (62) thing. Linda Yes, you're right. Daisy Look. This bird is trapped. It can't (63) . Jack Poor thing. Can I help? Daisy Yes, you hold him still and I'll (64) the plastic bag. Linda Oh, the TV reporters are coming. Jack We (65) help them to make the documentary. VIII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. Last month Lan's father (66) her to a glass factory. They visited the recycling workshop where the broken glass was smashed (67) small pieces, and the glass was washed with a particular detergent liquid. After that, it was dried up and mixed (68) some chemicals. The mixture was put into a very (69) temperature furnace to melt into liquid. The workers in the factory used long pipes (70 ) the liquid into a variety of shapes. All the glassware looks nice. Lan was very impressed by the journey. 66. A. asked B. took C. told D. gave 67. A. under B. into C. in D. on 68. A. in B. of C. up D. with 69. A. high B. strong C. low D. weak 70. A. change B. to make C. to blow D. to have IX. Read the following passage, and then answer the questions below. Every day of the year throughout the world, about twenty million paper bags and the newspapers are screwed and thrown away. Making paper requires a lot of wood pulp and the work of millions of workers. Many countries have had plans to recycle waste paper to save money and labor. In countries where there is the cooperation of the public, paper mills recycle as much as sixty percent of waste paper. Their simple work is to take away the ink, crush it up and make it into pulp again. For every ton of recycled newsprint, twelve trees can be saved. We can insist that the more paper people save, the more trees are preserved. 71. How many paper bags and newspapers are screwed and thrown away every day? 72. What have many countries done to save money and labor in making paper? 73. What percentage of waste paper is recycled with the help of the public? 74 What do the paper mills do to reuse waste paper? 75. How many trees can be saved for every ton of recycled newsprint? X. Make sentences using the words and phrases given. 76. We/ try/ recycled/ rubbish. 77. Don't/ throw/ plastic bags/ because/ you/ reuse. 78. You/ use/ reusable bags/ when/ you/ shopping. 79. If/ river/ polluted/ fish/ die. 80. If/ people/ cycle/ more/ there/ less/ pollution.   Unit 12: ROBOTS A. PHONETICS Put the words in the correct column according to the pronunciation of the underlined part. B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR. I. Put the words or phrases given in the box in the correct line with the appropriate verbs. There are some that can be put more than one line. l. recognize: 2. do: 3. make: 4. understand: 5. lift: 6. guard:

II. Fill the table below with the correct phrases from the box. Write sentences using "will be able to". Types of robots What they can do Home robots Teaching robots Worker robots Doctor robots Space robots Example: Home robots will be able to cook our meals. III. Write questions using "could" and use them to ask your partners. Example: ready four  "Could you read when you were four?" - "Yes, I could./ No, I couldn't." 1. write your name/ two? 2. walk/ one? 3. count to ten/ three? 4. speak English/ twelve? 5. ride a bike/ ten? IV. Complete the sentences, using "couldn't" and the verbs in the box. 1. My dad to work because he was ill. 2. John his pen. It wasn't in his school bag. 3. Mary wasn't hungry - she her lunch. 4. I Jane because I don't speak German. 5. We the teacher because the students were very noisy. 6. Tom to music because his CD player was broken. 7. I was very tired but I . 8. We tennis because the weather was bad. C. SPEAKING What could/ can/ will a robot do? Make conversations between student A and student B talking about their robots, using "could/ can/ will be able to". Robots Past Now Future Robot 1 (Student A) clean the floors recognize the voice understand people guard the house greet people in Vietnamese and English play football Robot 2 (Student B) lift heavy boxes control the temperatures of the house play the piano take care of the garden wash vegetables cook meals Example: A: My robot could clean the floors ….. and when I bought it. Now ….. B: Great! My robot could ….. D. READING I. Read the text, and decide whether the statements are True or False. Worker robots are becoming more popular in industries. Nowadays they can do more difficult jobs in many factories. The use of robots helps factories increase the quality of their products because robots can do the job well for many hours while humans can get tired and bored. Engineers can make robots more effective and useful at home, at school, and at work. However, a robot uses on average about 100 more times energy than a human to do the same job. The latest 20 kg robot can lift 2 kg, but a 5 kg human arm can lift 50 kg. True False 1. Factories are using more robots.   2. The use of robots helps make the quality of the products better.   3. Robots play an important role at homes, at schools, and in offices.   4. For the same job, a robot uses the same amount of energy as a worker does.   5. With the same weight, a robot lift things heavier than a man can do.   II. Read the passage, and then answer the questions. People are very interested in robots. Some of them look like mechanical dolls to play with. Most of them look like other machines of today's high technology. Serious research on intelligent robots began in the 1960s in several countries. Now we are on the fifth generation of robots. The first robots were very expensive. They cost $500,000 when a worker could do the same work for $15 an hour. By the early 1970s, a robot brain, a computer, cost $300,000. Today's robots cost from $15,000 to $150,000. One of the advantages of robots is that they can work in situations that are dangerous or harmful for human workers. Today there are millions of people who work at machines in the world. Robots will replace them. Part of the problem will be solved because of the decrease in the number of births. There will be fewer people looking for jobs. Many people will find changes in their jobs, and they will not like some of them. The students of today must be sure that these changes are good. Robots must improve, not harm, the quality of human life. 1. What generation of robots are we on now? 2. What is one of the advantages of robots? 3. What makes a robot brain? 4. Why aren't people no longer worried that robots will replace them? 5. What is the thing that students of today are sure? III. Read the passage, and then answer the questions. Most robots today are industrial robots. Humans use them to make work easier and quicker. You often see them in car factories where they put the parts of the cars together. They are useful for this kind of work as it is 'dull, dirty and dangerous' – DVD. Robots are often used for DDD jobs and where a specific action needs to be repeated. It is very difficult for humans to do this. There are many different types of robots. Some robots travel through space, work on the bottom of the ocean, or go inside volcanoes. They do the work of people, but for a different reason this time: there are places that are very dangerous for people, or impossible for people to go to. Robots are everywhere. Most people don't know that robots help us everyday and in many different ways. In most houses, there are robots. For example, in some houses today there is a washing machine in the kitchen. Washing machines are robots. People can programme them and then they wash clothes automatically. Some scientists make robots for fun. For example, the dogs are made as toys for small children. Japan produces the most robots. Every year in the capital, Tokyo, there is a robot exhibition called Robodex. It is the largest robot exhibition in the world. 1. What can robots do in car factories? 2. Why are robots useful or this kind of work? 3. Why do people often use robots to work on the bottom of the ocean or inside volcanoes? 4. How can people make washing machines useful? 5. Can robots bring us fun? Give an example. E. WRITING Write sentences about what robots will be able to do or will not be able to do in the year 2050, using "will be able to" or "won't be able to" and the clues given. do all the housework have conversations with us guard all our houses, offices, and factories examine our health give us medicines for our illnesses take care of sick people look after small children and old people give lessons in classrooms help students do their homework design other robots make planes, ships, spaceships   TEST (UNIT 12) I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. house B. mouse C. shout D. ought 2. A. noise B. soil C. doing D. boil 3. A. could B. our C. should D. would 4. A. so B. told C. now D. go 5. A. lesson B. house C. sound D. noisy II. Find one odd word for each question, and then read them aloud. 6. A. could B. will C. can D. run 7. A. love B. like C. enjoy D. hate 8. A. wasteful B. useful C. helpful D. careful 9. A. expensive B. useful C. costly D. noisy 10. A. feeling B. emotion C. thinking D. activity III. Choose the correct answers. 11. Robots can our houses when we are away. A. see B. guard C. look at D. look 12. In the future, robots will be able to do more things for us. A. easy B. harder C. complicated D. much difficul 13. I don't agree you that robots will be able to write a letter to an English friend. A. of B. about C. to D. with 14. They will be very useful because they will be able to do everything for us. A. most B. most of C. almost D. almost of 15. "Do you think robots can work longer than people getting tired?" A. but B. with C. without D. of 16. My father always coffee at home instead of going to the coffee shop. A. do B. does C. make D. makes 17. Robots will be able to the personal computer in the future. A. do B. replace C. make D. recognise 18. Nowadays robots can't talk to people or play sport, but in the future I think they . A. can B. could C. will D. do 19. "Will robots be able our voices?" A. to recognise B. recognising C. to recognising D. for recognising 20. Robots can't talk to people or recognise our voices, but scientists are working the solution. A. at B. on C. in D. with 21. Many people think spending money on robots is a complete of time and money. A. cut B. number C. waste D. amount 22. " you walk when you were two?" A. Can B. Could C. Will D. Do 23. These robots can do many things for the such as cleaning streets or watering plants. A. common B. best C. human D. public 24. Home robots can do things repairing things around the house or looking after the garden. A. such B. like C. with D. of 25. " do you think about the new kinds of robots?" A. How B. What C. Why D. When 26. Our future robot will be able to help us the gardening. A. do B. make C. try D. plant 27. "Robots are helping us a lot in industry, education, and in our house" - " " A. I agree with you B. I hope not C. Do you agree with that? D. What about you? 28. "We waste a lot of money and time researching and making robots" " ". A. I think not. B. I don't think so. C. I agree with. D. I don't hope so. 29. We must be careful because some people may use robots . A. do good things B. to do good things C. do bad things D. to do bad things 30. Robots will be very useful for our lives but they use energy. A. some B. a little C. D. too much IV. Write sentences with "can/ could/ will be able to", using the information about robots in the table. Past Now Future - (31) lift heavy things - (32) make and serve coffee - (33) answer the door - (34) guard the house - (35) understand what we say - (36) do the gardening - (37) greet people in English - (38) take care of the house - (39) play football - (40) design other robots 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. V. Complete the conversations with the phrases in the box, expressing your opinion. 41. A: Robots make our lives easier and more comfortable. B: 42. A: Robots can work everywhere in the world, including on the seabed or in a volcano. B: 43. A: Teaching robots can explain the lessons again or help students with their homework. B: 44. A: Worker robots will be able to play sports. B: 45. A: Home robots will be able to have conversations with us. B: VI. Fill in each blank with ONE suitable word. 46. I think robots are very useful they won't be able to do all of our work. 47. the bed when you get out of your bedroom. 48. Space robots can build space on the Moon, and on many other planets. 49. Home robots can cook, make tea, or the laundry. 50. robots will be able to do most of our work and we will live more comfortably. 51. Our class are talking about the of robots in the future. 52. Robots will be able to our voices. 53. We think home robots will be able to do all of our work at home, and there will be for us to do. 54. They will be able to do many things humans. 55. Now robots can the house and catch any robber trying to enter it. VII. Fill in each blank with the phrases in the box to complete the conversation. John: Today we will have a discussion about robots. Do we need robots? What is John your opinion, Peter? Peter: Well, I think robots are now very useful because they can help us do many things, especially simple and repeated jobs. But they will never be able to do all of our work. (56) , Mary? Mary: (57) . Robots are only machines, so they can't do creative and difficult jobs. John: (58) you, Tom? John: (59) . In the past, robots could only do simple things, but in the future they will be more "intelligent" and will be able to understand what we say, talk to us, and do most of our work. Mai: (60) . And our life will be more comfortable and interesting. VIII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. Rescue robots (61) hi-tech toys, but we are now using more robotic planes, helicopters. We can use them after storms, earthquakes, or fires to provide us with important (62) . They have cameras and microphones that help rescue workers understand how much damage (63) and (64) where the victims are. These planes work (65) between 30 and 120 metres in the air and they can rescue people in somewhere very dangerous. 61. A. look B. look like C. looks like D. look at 62. A. information B. newspapers C. ideas D. thing 63. A. there B. it was C. there has D. there is 64. A. find B. find out C. finds D. finds out 65. A. much B. more C. the best D. best IX. Read the passage, and then decide whether the statements are True or False. In South Korea, the robot Olympics takes place every year. It brings together groups from around the world who are interested in robots. At the event, people of all ages can take part in the competition. Children as young as six years old build and make programmes for robots that can do all kinds of things such as running or kicking a ball - that's very useful in sports. a bar Robot Wars is another form of entertainment for robot lovers. It is a TV show and remote-controlled robot toy cars take part in games. The most popular game is when teams of people make the toy cars fight each other until there is the only one that can run - the winner. The first Robot Wars competition was held in San Francisco in August, 1994. People from over 45 countries, including Britain, Sweden, Italy and China now can watch that TV show. Questions: True/ False 66. The robot Olympics takes place every four years. 67. Only the teams from South Korea take part in the robot Olympics. 68. Robot lovers are people who are interested in designing, making, using and watching robots. 69. Old and young children can build robots at the event. 70. Robots at the robot Olympics can be useful in sports. 71. Remote-controlled cars take part in the Robot Wars competitions. 72. The first Robot Wars competition was held in the USA. 73. People in Asia do not watch the Robot Wars competitions. 74. People from many countries in the world can watch the Robot Wars competitions on TV. 75. Robots can be used for fun. X. Make sentences using the words and phrases given. 76. Robots/ not only/ talk/ people/ but/ understand/ what/ they/ think. 77. Robots/ recognize/ our voices/ faces/ they/ not/ think/ like/ humans. 78. You/ think/ robots/ build houses/ sea/ us? 79. I/ agree/ you/ that/ life/ more comfortable/ future. 80. More people/ lose/ jobs/ robots/ do/ many kinds/ jobs.   TEST YOURSELF 4 I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. card B. hand C. band D. stand 2. A. thank B. think C. through D. then 3. A. town B. own C. cow D. town 4. A. loud B. should C. sound D. mountain 5. A. yard B. bad C. cat D. hat II. Choose the correct answers. 6. If people can wastes, they will save a lot of money. A. reuse B. reduce C. rebuild D. use 7. new technology, we now have super smart TVs, smart phones. A. Because B. Because of C. Thanks D. Thanks to 8. Robots will do most of the housework, we will have more time for our family. A. so B. but C. although D. if 9. We should have recycling bins in each classroom for things. A. use B. reuse C. reused D. reusable 10. If we plant more trees, the will be greener. A. neighbour B. soil C. air D. neighbourhood 11. All of the machines will have a special card . A. start B. to start C. starting D. to starting 12. If we all the trees, there will be no more oxygen for us to breathe. A. cuts B. cut off C. cutting D. cut down 13. We should open all the windows, so we don't use air-conditioners. A. have B. have to C. needn't D. need 14. Plant more trees in the schoolyard because they will provide shade and the atmosphere fresher. A. do B. make C. have D. use 15. Our dream house will use only solar energy so that we can make the clean and green. A. nature B. environment C. kitchen D. home 16. Many products are now helping you your energy bills. A. reduce B. reuse C. recycle D. cut down 17. It takes a lot of energy to keep food cool, so don't the fridge door open or putting hot things inside. A. make B. have C. leave D. stop 18. Future houses will have hi-tech rooms for all of the family members. A. read B. to read C. reading D. to reading 19. Our houses will use the sun or the wind electricity. A. to have B. to do C. to make D. to give 20. In the future, cars might use energy from . A. gas B. water C. oil D. power 21. Our dream house will be located the sea. A. on B. at C. in D. between 22. Don't old things because perhaps you will need them later. A. throw B. throw away C. throwing D. throwing away 23. causes many breathing problems. A. Fresh air B. Fresher air C. Polluting air D. Polluted air 24. We won't use CD players because we will have smart watches that music. A. play B. plays C. hear D. listen to 25. If you eat fast food, you will be fatter easily. A. very B. very much C. too much D. most III. Complete the first conditional sentences. 26. If we stay at home, we (miss) the show. 27. We (ask) about it, if you want. 28. If he (want) it, we'll buy it. 29. If it (not/ work) , we'll take it back. 30. They (not/ go) on holiday this year, if their friends come to see them. 31. You will be tired tomorrow if you (not/ go) to bed early. 32. (the boys/ wear) their new T-shirts tomorrow if it is sunny? 33. The cake (burn) if he doesn't turn off the oven. 34. We won't go to the beach tomorrow if it (rain) . 35. Will you walk to school if the bus (not/ come) soon? IV. Fill in each blank with ONE suitable word. 36. Soil pollution can make die. 37. What do these three Rs for? 38. If we all use this kind of bag, we'll help to protect the . 39. We should find ways to reuse our old items before throwing them away. 40. If the river is not , there will be more fish. V. Complete the conversation with will, won't or might. A Do you think it (41) rain tomorrow? B I don't think so. I think it (42) be sunny. It (43) be cloudy but it certainly (44) be rainy. A I think I (45) go to the beach. B I (46) come with you or I (47) stay at home. I (48) help my sister make a poster. She (49) need a new one. A (50) you go to the library with me now? B OK! VI. Complete the conversation. Use the first conditional. A (51) ? (you come to the concert/ I buy the tickets) B Yes, I (52) . A I (53. ask) Jack if he (54. want) to come too. B If Jack (55. come) , I (56) certainly go! A OK. If I (57. see) her, I (58. ask) her. B If she (59. not want) to come, I (60. ask) her out somewhere else. A That's fine. VII. Read the passage, and then fill in each blank with ONE appropriate word. produce I would like to live in one of the (61) modern houses in the world. It will produce all the energy it needs from the (62) energy, the wind energy, but not from gas, or oil. There will be modern electronic (63) in the kitchen such as a smart refrigerator, a dishwasher, a microwave oven, and so on. The house will also have a hi-tech TV that helps us to watch TV programmes from space. A home robot will be able to do all of (64) , so our life will become more comfortable than ever (65) . 61. A. much B. more C. most D. almost 62. A. sun B. solar C. sunny D. cloudy 63. A. appliances B. tools C. machines D. equip 64. A. housework B. the housework C. homework D. the homework 65. A. until B. after C. before D. then VIII. Read the text, and then decide whether the sentences are True or False. As good as new Do you think that people can make a fun bag with old juice cartons? The colourful T-shirt was once plastic bottles. It takes five large plastic bottles to make one large T-shirt. Scientists can make baseball caps from plastic bottles, too. They can also make sports shoes from car tyres. People use old newspapers, comics, and bus tickets to make beautiful bracelets. Next time you are out shopping, see how many recycled items you can find. Or why not try making something new from your old garbage? You can make greeting cards from old paper and magazines. You can make book covers from old plastic bags, posters, maps or even clothes. You save wrapping paper, gift boxes, and ribbons and use them again. 66. The shoes might be car tyres. 67. It is possible for scientists to recycle car tyres. 68. It takes one large bottle to make five large T-shirts. 69. You can make book covers from clothes. 70. You can reuse wrapping paper, gift boxes, and ribbons. IX. Read the text, and then answer the questions. Give your garbage a new home Recycling is a great idea, but before you throw your garbage into a recycling bin, stop and think. There are lots of other things you can do with your garbage. How about giving your old books, toys, or clothes to a charity? The charity will sell your old things to make money. Why not take old boxes, wrapping paper, greeting cards, and ribbons to a local school? Teachers will use them for art classes. What about taking old boxes and newspapers to pet shops? They will use them to make beds for the animals. Why not take old magazines to a local doctors offices? They will put them in the waiting room for patients to read. Some supermarkets recycle plastic bags, so you can return your bags to them. Your garbage is useful to other people. Find a new home for your old things and help your town. 71. Where can you take your old toys? 72. Where can you take your old boxes, wrapping paper, and greeting cards? 73. Where can you take your old newspapers? 74. Where can you take your old magazines? 75. Where can you take your plastic bags? X. Make sentences using the words and phrases given. 76. When/ Nam/ ten/ he/ speak/ English/ phone. 77. My sister/ write/ poems/ she/ eight. 78. They/ worried/ that/ some people/ use/ robots/ bad things. 79. If/ people/ plant/more trees/ area/ there/ be/ no floods. 80. If/ we/ recycle/ old newspapers/ we/ save/ lot/ labour/ trees.

.7 I knew that this road (be) __________ too narrow. 8. Right now I (attend) __________ class. Yesterday at this time I (attend) __________class. 9. Tomorrow I'm going to leave for home. When I (arrive) __________at the airport, Mary (wait) __________ for me. 10. Margaret was born in 1950. By last year, she (live) __________on this earth for 55 years . 11. The traffic was very heavy. By the time I (get) __________to Mary's party, everyone already (arrive) __________ 12. I will graduate in June. I (see) __________ you in July. By the time I (see) __________ you , I (graduate) __________. 13. I (visit) __________ my uncle's home regularly when I (be) __________ a child. 14. That book (be) __________ on the table for weeks. You (not read) __________ it yet ? 15. David (wash) __________ his hands. He just (repair) __________ the TV set. 16. You (be) __________here before? Yes, I (spend) __________ my holidays here last year. 17. We never (meet) __________ him. We don't know what he (look) _________

  • Hỏi từ APP VIETJACK She started learning English five years ago => she has............. Trả lời (11) Xem đáp án » 2 18672

33. After he (finish) __________ breakfast he (sit) __________down to write some letters. 34. She (have) __________a hard life, but she's always smiling. 35. I think Jim (be) __________ out of town

6. He told me that he (take) __________ a trip to California the following week cho mình xin nó ở thì gì và cách nhận biết

Bài 1 : Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verbs ( The present simple tense )

1. Does your family ( live ) ............ in Ha Noi ? No , it doesn't . We (live).................... in Thai Binh .

2. My house ( not have ) .................. a pool . 

3. .............. Mai (read ) .............. book every day ?

4. ............ Nga and Ha often (go) .............. to school on foot ?

5. Where  ........ your brother (walk) in the afternoon ? 

6. I and Nga ( not/go ) to school by bike every day . 

7. .............. your never (get) ................. up late ? 

8. What time ........... your mother ( go ) ............... to work ? 

9. He always (borrow) ................ me money and never (give) ............. back .

10 . How often ............. Long (wash) ............ his hair ?

11 . ................. they always (do) ................. their homework at home ?

  • Hỏi từ APP VIETJACK Write a paragraph of 40-50 words about the sport / game you talked about in 4 . You can also refer to the listening passages Trả lời (4) Xem đáp án » 9 15097
  • Hỏi từ APP VIETJACK I usually(have)..........breakfast at 7.00. She(live)......in a house? Trả lời (31) Xem đáp án » 4 13892

The problem seems to be (serious) ,............and.............

  • Xếp hạng tuần này
  • Xếp hạng tháng này

 alt=

Bài viết mới nhất Lớp 6

  • Góc tạo bởi kim phút và kim giờ tại thời điểm 9 giờ, 10 giờ, 6 giờ, 5 giờ lần lượt là bao nhiêu độ 1 năm trước 2659
  • Hãy vẽ một hình vuông và hai đường chéo của hình vuông đó 1 năm trước 1946
  • Hãy đo các góc dưới đây và so sánh số đo của chúng với 90° 1 năm trước 1862
  • Mỗi góc trong Hình 3 có số đo là bao nhiêu 1 năm trước 1824
  • Cho góc xOy như hình vẽ. Em hãy dùng thước đo góc đo góc xOy 1 năm trước 1844

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

Supply the correct form of the verb: They often (visit)________their parents in the holidays.

They often (visit)________their parents in the holidays.

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

Trả lời (1)

na na

often: dấu hiệu của thì HTĐ

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

Nếu bạn hỏi , bạn chỉ thu về một câu trả lời . Nhưng khi bạn suy nghĩ trả lời , bạn sẽ thu về gấp bội!

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

Lưu ý: Các trường hợp cố tình spam câu trả lời hoặc bị báo xấu trên 5 lần sẽ bị khóa tài khoản

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

Các câu hỏi mới

Give the correct form of the following verbs: she (walk) ………………… to school every morning..

17/11/2022 |   2 Trả lời

find the mistake in the each sentence below and correct it

1. She always puts a few salt in her suop.

2. We should collect empty cans and bottles because factories need it to recycle.

3. Do you know everyone about tom and jerry?

4. Where is your classrom-it"s on the nineth floor.

5. Listenning is more interesting than watch him.

02/12/2022 |   1 Trả lời

Viết dạng so sách hơn và so sánh hơn nhất của các tính và trạng từ sau:

1. beautiful

9. attractive

03/12/2022 |   1 Trả lời

Read the passage and then decide whether the sentences a True or False.

Viet Nam's New Year is known as Tet. It begins between January twenty-first and nineteenth. The exact date changes from year to year. Tet lasts ten days. The first three days are the most important. Vietnamese people believe that what people do during those

days will influence the whole year. As a result, they make every effort to avoid arguments and smile as much as possible. Vietnamese people believe that the first person through the door on New Year's Day can bring either good or bad luck. Children receive lucky money as they do in other countries.

1. Tet occurs in late January or early February.

2. There are two weeks for Lunar New Year.

3. People should not argue with each other at Tet.

4. The first visitor on New Year's Day brings good or bad luck.

5. Only children in Viet Nam get lucky money.

04/12/2022 |   1 Trả lời

Complete the sentences by using the verbs in brackets and shall/ will or the correct form of be going to:

Complete the sentences by using the verbs in brackets and  shall/ will  or the correct form of  be going to :

Craig:  Hey Mark! What (0)  are you going to do  (you do)  during half term?

Mark:  You (7) ___________  (not believe)  it but I (8) __________  (visit)  Switzerland!

Craig:  Really? That's so exciting! Switzerland is great. I'm sure you (9) _________  (love)  it!

Mark:  I think so, too. My family and I (10) __________  (stay)   at a hotel near the Swiss Alps.

Craig:  Wow!

Mark:  Yeah, it's great I (11) __________  (play)  in the snow every day. My brother and I (12) __________ also __________  (try)  to learn how to ski.

Craig:  You're so lucky. I wish I could go with you.

Mark:  Maybe you ca. (13) __________  (I/ ask)  my parents?

Craig:  Definitely!

Mark:  OK then. I (14) __________  (talks)  to them tonight.

Craig:  Great!

Mark:  I think we should go to class now or we (15) __________  (be)  late.

Craig:  You're right. Let's go!

10/12/2022 |   0 Trả lời

Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others:

18/12/2022 |   2 Trả lời

Choose the best answer

1: Is he ................................. Viet nam or China?

A. on B. at C. of D. from

2: Peter isn’t French. He’s ....................... .

A. England B. English C. America D. Vietnam

3: The .................. mountain in the world is Mount Everest.

A. high B. higher C. highest D. most high

4: Tokyo is the ................ of Japan.

A. town B. capital city C. country D. village

5: There is a lot of ................. in Viet Nam. Our country is very green.

A. sunny B.desert C. land D. rain

6: The ................... of Tokyo is 12 million.

A. people B. population C. Japanese D. person

7: Sears Tower in Chicago is a very ................... building.

A. tall B. long C. short D. small

8: This is my friend, Minh. He’s 1,68 meter ........................ .

A. short B. tall C. long D. high

9: Mexico City is the .................. city in the world.

A. big B. bigger C. biggest D. very big

10: What is your .................. ? – I’m Vietnamese.

A. country B.language C. capital D. nationality

11: This book has 400 pages. It is a ................. book.

A. thick B. thin C. strong D. longer 290: There isn’t .................. rain in the desert.

A. many B. much C. very D. a lot

12: We don’t have ............... deserts in Viet Nam.

A. a B. an C. any D. much

13: How............... is the Red River? - It’s 1,200 kilometers long.

A. tall B. high C. much D. long

14: How ................ are you going to stay there? - For a week.

A. many B. much C. long D. high

15: Lan is going to visit .................. to see the Great Wall.

A. England B. France C. Canada D. China

20/12/2022 |   0 Trả lời

Answer these below questions:

1. How were the furniture arranged?

2. What do you think about your house? Why?

02/01/2023 |   1 Trả lời

Viết các câu sau dựa vào các từ cho sẵn.

1. Where/Ann/usually/go/in the evening? - She/usually/go/to the cinema.

2. Who/Carol and Bill/visit/on Sundays? - They/visit/their grandparents.

3. What/David/usually drink/with/his breakfast? - He/usally/drink/coffee.

4. When/you/watch TV? - I/watch TV/in the evening.

5. Why/ Rachel/stay/in bed? - She/stay/in bed/because/she/be/sick.

29/01/2023 |   1 Trả lời

Complete the sentence: He became a famous singer _____ the age of 18.

04/03/2023 |   3 Trả lời

Sắp xếp lại thành câu: He/learn/a lot of interesting things/ these programmes

21/03/2023 |   1 Trả lời

Hoàn thành câu sau: He wants ___________ an engineer?

30/03/2023 |   1 Trả lời

Viết lại câu sao cho nghĩa không đổi.

1. This book is cheaper than my book.

My book .........

2. What is the price of the tickets?

How ..............

01/04/2023 |   3 Trả lời

Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

1. A. chi n            B. ch aos           C. ch ild              D. ch arge

2. A. im a ge         B. arc a de          C. t a ke              D. aw a ke

3. A. pl ays           B. s ays               C. d ays               D. st ays

03/04/2023 |   2 Trả lời

Đặt câu hỏi với các từ được cho trong ngoặc.

1. "No", I'll not help you

2. I will become "a doctor" in the future.

3. When we get to Ha Long Bay, we will "swim in the sea" and explore the caves.

4. He will be there "in two days".

5. Her friend will go to Italy "on Christmas".

6. "Yes", my dad will drive me to school.

7. "Linda" will take part in the concert on Tuesday.

8. Tom will buy Mary "a new dress".

9. Lucy will "cook dinner" tonight.

10. "No", my sister won't make a cake for me.

11. I'll play "at the sports ground" in the evening.

08/04/2023 |   0 Trả lời

Put the verb in brackets in the correct form.

1. I _____ (play) tennis tomorrow.

2. He (pay) _____, I promise

3. _____ you (open) the window, please?

4. It's dark. I (switch on) _____ the light.

5. I'm afraid I (not/ be) _____ able to come tomorrow.

6. That suitcase is too heavy. They (help) _____ you.

7. _____ she (go) to the sea later today? _____ (be) back.

8. We (not/ finish) _____ our homework in an hour.

9. I think Tom (not/ pass) _____ the exam.

08/04/2023 |   2 Trả lời

Rearrange the sentence

your house /big /and/ and /there / a lot / furniture

29/04/2023 |   0 Trả lời

Write a short paragraph about what should you do to protect the earth?

viết topic về chủ đề what should you do to protect the earth?

yc sử dụng đa dạng cấu trúc câu

02/05/2023 |   0 Trả lời

Fill in the blank with a suitable verb: They ..... english for three years

they ..... english for three years

14/09/2023 |   0 Trả lời

Complete the sentences: Which/grade/you?

Dựa vào từ gợi ý viết thành câu hoàn trỉnh

Which/grade/you?

There/285/students/my school.

she/long/curly/has/hair/.//

30/10/2023 |   0 Trả lời

Được đề xuất cho bạn

XEM NHANH CHƯƠNG TRÌNH LỚP 6

Toán 6 Chân Trời Sáng Tạo

Toán 6 Kết Nối Tri Thức

Toán 6 Cánh Diều

Giải bài tập Toán 6 CTST

Giải bài tập Toán 6 KNTT

Giải bài tập Toán 6 Cánh Diều

Trắc nghiệm Toán 6

Đề thi giữa HK2 môn Toán 6

Ngữ Văn 6 CTST

Ngữ Văn 6 KNTT

Ngữ Văn 6 Cánh Diều

Soạn Văn 6 CTST

Soạn Văn 6 KNTT

Soạn Văn 6 Cánh Diều

Đề thi giữa HK2 môn Ngữ Văn 6

Tiếng Anh 6

Giải Tiếng Anh 6 CTST

Giải Tiếng Anh 6 KNTT

Giải Tiếng Anh 6 Cánh Diều

Trắc nghiệm Tiếng Anh 6 CTST

Trắc nghiệm Tiếng Anh 6 KNTT

Trắc nghiệm Tiếng Anh 6 Cánh Diều

Giải Sách bài tập Tiếng Anh 6

Đề thi giữa HK2 môn Tiếng Anh 6

Khoa học tự nhiên 6

Khoa học tự nhiên 6 CTST

Khoa học tự nhiên 6 KNTT

Khoa học tự nhiên 6 Cánh Diều

Giải bài tập KHTN 6 CTST

Giải bài tập KHTN 6 KNTT

Giải bài tập KHTN 6 Cánh Diều

Trắc nghiệm Khoa học tự nhiên 6

Đề thi giữa HK2 môn KHTN 6

Tin học 6 CTST

Tin học 6 KNTT

Tin học 6 Cánh Diều

Giải bài tập Tin học 6 CTST

Giải bài tập Tin học 6 KNTT

Giải bài tập Tin học 6 Cánh Diều

Trắc nghiệm Tin học 6

Đề thi giữa HK2 môn Tin học 6

Lịch sử và Địa lý 6

Lịch sử & Địa lí 6 CTST

Lịch sử & Địa lí 6 KNTT

Lịch sử & Địa lí 6 Cánh Diều

Giải bài tập LS và ĐL 6 CTST

Giải bài tập LS và ĐL 6 KNTT

Giải bài tập LS và ĐL 6 Cánh Diều

Trắc nghiệm Lịch sử và Địa lí 6

Đề thi giữa HK2 môn LS và ĐL 6

Công nghệ 6

Công Nghệ 6 CTST

Công Nghệ 6 KNTT

Công Nghệ 6 Cánh Diều

Giải bài tập Công Nghệ 6 CTST

Giải bài tập Công Nghệ 6 KNTT

Giải bài tập Công Nghệ 6 Cánh Diều

Trắc nghiệm Công nghệ 6

Đề thi giữa HK2 môn Công nghệ 6

Hỏi đáp lớp 6

Tư liệu lớp 6

Đề thi giữa HK1 lớp 6

Đề thi giữa HK2 lớp 6

Đề thi HK1 lớp 6

Đề thi HK2 lớp 6

Xem nhiều nhất tuần

Video Toán nâng cao lớp 6

Đề cương giữa HK2 lớp 6

Văn mẫu về bài thơ Lượm

Văn mẫu về Đêm nay Bác không ngủ

Văn mẫu về Sơn Tinh, Thủy Tinh

Những cánh buồm - Ngữ văn 6 Tập 2 Chân trời sáng tạo

Lịch sử và Địa lí 6 Kết nối tri thức Bài 10: Hy Lạp và La Mã cổ đại

Khoa học tự nhiên 6 Kết nối tri thức Bài 16: Hỗn hợp các chất

Bạn vui lòng đăng nhập trước khi sử dụng chức năng này.

  • Skip to main content
  • Keyboard shortcuts for audio player

Strange News

Why do we leap day we remind you (so you can forget for another 4 years).

Rachel Treisman

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

A clock showing February 29, also known as leap day. They only happen about once every four years. Olivier Le Moal/Getty Images hide caption

A clock showing February 29, also known as leap day. They only happen about once every four years.

Nearly every four years, the Gregorian calendar — which is used in the majority of countries around the world — gets an extra day: February 29.

For some people, leap day means frog jokes and extravagant birthday parties. For many, it may conjure memories of the 2010 rom-com Leap Year , which harkens back to the Irish tradition by which women can propose to men on that one day. And others likely see it merely as a funny quirk in the calendar, or just another Thursday.

Leap day means several different things to Alexander Boxer, a data scientist and the author of A Scheme of Heaven: The History of Astrology and the Search for Our Destiny in Data .

Our lives are ruled by the illusion of time

Our lives are ruled by the illusion of time

Literally speaking, he says, it's an "awkward calendar hack" aimed at making up for the fact that a year isn't a flat number of days, but more like 365 and a quarter. But there's more to it than that.

"I think the significance of the leap year is that it's a great reminder that the universe is really good at defying our attempts to devise nice and pretty and aesthetically pleasing systems to fit it in," he told NPR's Morning Edition .

Leap for joy! The creative ways NPR listeners are marking Feb. 29

Leap for joy! The creative ways NPR listeners are marking Feb. 29

Boxer says it's also a great reminder that the calendar most people rely on every day is actually the product of multiple civilizations, building off each other as they share in what he calls "this great undertaking of trying to understand time."

So where did leap year come from, and what are we supposed to do with our extra day? NPR's Morning Edition spoke with experts in astronomy, history and economics to find out.

Why do we have leap years?

Most people know that a single day is about 24 hours long, and that there are 365 days in a year.

But it actually takes Earth 365.242190 days to orbit the sun, says Jackie Faherty, an astronomer at the American Museum of Natural History in New York.

"And that .242190 days to go around the sun is the entire reason why we have a leap year," she explained.

Centuries ago, people kept track of the sun's position — such as for a solstice or the longest day of the year — to know when to do things like plant and harvest. Over time, she says, the need grew for a centralized calendar system.

The Hebrew, Chinese and Buddhist calendars, among others, have long contained entire leap months. The West is no stranger to leap years either.

The science and shared history behind the Gregorian and Chinese calendars

The science and shared history behind the Gregorian and Chinese calendars

The Julian Calendar, which Julius Caesar introduced in 45 BC, included an extra day every year. He borrowed the idea from the Egyptians, though his math wasn't exactly correct . Caesar overestimated the solar year by about 11 minutes, leading to an overcorrection by about eight days each millennium. That explains why Easter, for example, fell further and further away from the spring equinox over time.

Pope Gregory XIII sought to address that problem in the 16th century with the Gregorian Calendar , which adds leap days in years divisible by four, unless the year is also divisible by 100. To make matters even more confusing, a leap day is still added in years divisible by 400.

Why add the extra day in February? Boxer, the data scientist, says the Romans considered it an unlucky month. On top of that, they were deeply suspicious of odd numbers. Because February only had 28 days to begin with, they "just shoved it into February," though leap day used to be on the 24th.

Ultimately, says Boxer, the calendar is a compromise.

"On the one hand, you don't want a calendar that makes it so complicated to know how many days it's going to be from one year to the next," he added. "But on the other hand, you want to make sure that winter holidays, too, in the winter and summer holidays, stay in the summer, especially if your holidays are related to things like agriculture, harvest holidays and whatnot."

What does leap day mean for birthdays?

One tangible impact of a leap year is that birthdays will fall on a different day of the week than their usual pattern.

"If your birthday was on a Tuesday last year, you're going to skip over Wednesday and you'll have a birthday on a Thursday," said Faherty. "Not to mention those poor people that are born on February 29, a day that only exists every four years."

There are about 5 million people worldwide with a Feb. 29 birthday, according to the History Channel . The list of so-called "leaplings" includes celebrities such as motivational speaker Tony Robbins and hip-hop artist Ja Rule. And peoples' odds of joining their ranks are small — about 1-in-1,461, to be exact.

Several leaplings told NPR that there's no set rule on which day to celebrate their birthday in a non-leap year. Some prefer Feb. 28, others March 1 and many do both.

To reignite the joy of childhood, learn to live on 'toddler time'

Shots - Health News

To reignite the joy of childhood, learn to live on 'toddler time'.

"My answer to this question has evolved over the years," said Michael Kozlowski Jr., a leap day baby based in Belgium. "It used to be February for the reasons that I identified more with that month compared to March. But these days I honestly like to celebrate both days or even the entire week. It seems only fair and it works and it feels great."

They acknowledged both pros and cons of having a leap day birthday. Several said that while they were teased about it in grade school, it helped them develop a thicker skin and gave them a fun fact for life — plus more days to celebrate.

Plus, many online forms — including for the DMV — don't recognize Feb. 29 as a possible birth date. Raenell Dawn, the co-founder of the Honor Society of Leap Year Day Babies, told NPR in 2020 that those logistics can cause trouble, especially when it comes to things like driver's license expirations. But she also said there's no reason for leaplings to change their birth date.

"Humans program the computer, so the humans need to program it correctly," she said. "'Cause February 29 is everyone's extra day. And it's a day that started in 45 B.C. And it's the most important date on the calendar because it keeps all the dates on the calendar in line with the seasons."

What should you do — and not do — on Feb. 29?

There are lots of superstitions and traditions about leap day on the internet, and a few celebrations to look forward to IRL.

A decades-old French satirical newspaper , La Bougie du Sapeur , goes to print only on Feb. 29 — this year included . There are also festivities in the "Leap Year Capital of the World," as Anthony, Texas, is known.

Leapling Mary Ann Brown petitioned Congress to give Anthony, Texas — and Anthony, New Mexico, on the other side of the state line — that designation in 1988 because of the "numerous number of leap year births that happened within the two towns," Mayor Anthony Turner told NPR over email.

In years past, he said, the community marked leap day with a parade that stretched between the two towns of Anthony. This year, the Texas side is hosting a two-day leap year festival , complete with live music, local vendors and an exclusive barbecue dinner for leap day babies.

"This is an opportunity for the community to take pride in the fact that they live in the leap year capital of the world, and a great chance for everyone from everywhere to join us and enjoy the true beauty of our lovely town," Turner added.

For Leap Day Only, A Rare Newspaper Goes To Print

For Leap Day Only, A Rare Newspaper Goes To Print

Worldwide, most leap day lore revolves around romance and marriage, as the History Channel explains.

According to one legend, complaints from St. Bridget prompted St. Patrick to designate Feb. 29 as the one day when women can propose to men. The custom spread to Scotland and England, where the British said that any man who rejects a woman's proposal owes her several pairs of fine gloves. In Greece and some other places, it's considered bad luck to get married on leap day.

Katherine Parkin, a history professor at Monmouth University, said she doesn't believe any of the myths are true — but doesn't think they had to be in order to take hold, which they did in America as early as the 1780s.

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

An example of one of many early 20th century postcards by cartoonist Clare Victor Dwiggins — "Dwig" — showing women pursuing men in a leap year. Katherine Parkin hide caption

An example of one of many early 20th century postcards by cartoonist Clare Victor Dwiggins — "Dwig" — showing women pursuing men in a leap year.

The real origin, she believes, is that people have historically liked to challenge gender and gender roles.

"And in the case of marriage, to have a reversal of that power, I think is really unusual," she added. "And it ties perfectly with this unusual date. Where did it come from and where did it go? And so I think it really plays well into people's imagination and playfulness."

But Parkin says her research points to darker undertones behind the tradition — namely, that it was actually intended to ridicule women.

The dark history of eating green on St. Patrick's Day

The dark history of eating green on St. Patrick's Day

She points to the proliferation of postcards in the 20th century — which people would send each other across all kinds of relationships — that portrayed women who proposed to men as desperate, unattractive and aggressive, such as holding butterfly nets and pointing guns at guys.

"It's proving to ... reinforce that it's a leap year and that this tradition exists and yet at the same time telling women, you really don't want to do this because it looks bad for you," Parkin said. "As a historian, I look back to this tradition and see it as part of an American desire to offer women false empowerment."

Of the more than 100 people who responded to an NPR callout about their leap day celebrations and traditions, several said they had gotten engaged or married on Feb. 29. Only one explicitly mentioned gender roles.

"I think this is the day that (traditionally) a woman was able to propose?" wrote Suzanne Forbes. "If so, I plan on proposing to myself in a beautiful southern setting (likely [Georgia], while solo kayaking)!"

What if we didn't have leap years?

Not everyone loves leap day.

Steve Hanke, a professor of applied economics at Johns Hopkins University, is one critic. He argues that the current calendar, in which dates occur on different days of the week each year, creates scheduling problems as well as confusion around holiday dates.

That's why he and Johns Hopkins astrophysics professor Dick Henry have created the Hanke–Henry Permanent Calendar , a proposal for a new calendar that would implement an occasional leap week rather than leap day.

"The great thing about the permanent calendar is that it never changes," Hanke explained. "The date would be on the same day. Every year, year after year after year ... January 1st is always on a Monday. July 4th is always on a Thursday. December 25th, Christmas, is always on a Monday."

How did COVID warp our sense of time? It's a matter of perception

How did COVID warp our sense of time? It's a matter of perception

Their calendar divides the year into four three-month quarters, each with the same number of days. The first two months of each quarter — including January and February — would always have 30 days, and the third month would have 31. Every six years, there would be an extra seven days at the end of December, which Hanke says would "eliminate calendar drift."

Hanke argues that his proposed calendar would save confusion and potentially money, pointing to studies in the United Kingdom that show the economic gains associated with having public holidays on weekends. And he believes it would be easy for a president to implement the new system by executive order, something that he and Henry have even drafted, just in case.

Still, he describes their lobbying efforts as more of a "soft sell" at the moment.

It seems like the current calendar system — with its leap days and years — may be here to stay, despite the many possible alternates. Faherty, the astronomer, says if someone truly wanted to keep track of their path around the sun, one could "build yourself a henge and know when the solstice is and carry on from that."

"But we don't do that," she said. "We gave it an interval and we follow that, so now we're stuck. And now you have to enter these leap days, to try and do our best to fix the human need to have a document that says where exactly you are in the position that the Earth is falling around."

And that's probably enough to think about for the year, maybe even the next three.

Adam Bearne and Julie Depenbrock contributed reporting.

Read our research on: Immigration & Migration | Podcasts | Election 2024

Regions & Countries

Race and lgbtq issues in k-12 schools, what teachers, teens and the u.s. public say about current curriculum debates.

Demonstrators outside a school board meeting in Glendale, California, on June 20, 2023. (David McNew/Getty Images)

Pew Research Center conducted this study to better understand how public K-12 teachers, teens and the American public see topics related to race, sexual orientation and gender identity playing out in the classroom.

The bulk of the analysis in this report is based on an online survey of 2,531 U.S. public K-12 teachers conducted from Oct. 17 to Nov. 14, 2023. The teachers surveyed are members of RAND’s American Teacher Panel, a nationally representative panel of public school K-12 teachers recruited through MDR Education. Survey data is weighted to state and national teacher characteristics to account for differences in sampling and response to ensure they are representative of the target population.

For the questions for the general public, we surveyed 5,029 U.S. adults from Nov. 9 to Nov. 16, 2023. The adults surveyed are members of the Ipsos KnowledgePanel, a nationally representative online survey panel. Panel members are randomly recruited through probability-based sampling, and households are provided with access to the Internet and hardware if needed. To ensure that the results of this survey reflect a balanced cross section of the nation, the data is weighted to match the U.S. adult population by gender, age, education, race and ethnicity and other categories.

For questions for teens, we conducted an online survey of 1,453 U.S. teens from Sept. 26 to Oct. 23, 2023, through Ipsos. Ipsos recruited the teens via their parents, who were part of its KnowledgePanel. The survey was weighted to be representative of U.S. teens ages 13 to 17 who live with their parents by age, gender, race and ethnicity, household income, and other categories. The survey on teens was reviewed and approved by an external institutional review board (IRB), Advarra, an independent committee of experts specializing in helping to protect the rights of research participants.

Here are the questions used for this report , along with responses, and the survey methodology .

Throughout the report, references to White, Black and Asian adults include those who are not Hispanic and identify as only one race. Hispanics are of any race. The views and experiences of teachers and teens who are Asian American or part of other racial and ethnic groups are not analyzed separately in this report due to sample limitations. Data for these groups is incorporated into the general population figures throughout the report.

All references to party affiliation include those who lean toward that party. Republicans include those who identify as Republicans and those who say they lean toward the Republican Party. Democrats include those who identify as Democrats and those who say they lean toward the Democratic Party.

Political leaning of school districts is based on whether the majority of those residing in the school district voted for Republican Donald Trump or Democrat Joe Biden in the 2020 presidential election.

Amid national debates about what schools are teaching , we asked public K-12 teachers, teens and the American public how they see topics related to race, sexual orientation and gender identity playing out in the classroom.

A pie chart showing that about 4 in 10 teachers say current debates about K-12 education have had a negative impact on their job.

A sizeable share of teachers (41%) say these debates have had a negative impact on their ability to do their job. Just 4% say these debates have had a positive impact, while 53% say the impact has been neither positive nor negative or that these debates have had no impact.

And 71% of teachers say teachers themselves don’t have enough influence over what’s taught in public schools in their area.

In turn, a majority of teachers (58%) say their state government has too much influence over this. And more say the federal government, the local school board and parents have too much influence than say they don’t have enough.

Most of the findings in this report come from a survey of 2,531 U.S. public K-12 teachers conducted Oct. 17-Nov. 14, 2023, using the RAND American Teacher Panel. 1 The survey looks at teachers’ views on:

  • Race and LGBTQ issues in the classroom ( Chapter 1 )
  • Current debates over what schools should be teaching and the role of key groups ( Chapter 2 )

It follows a fall 2022 survey of K-12 parents that explored similar topics.

This report also includes some findings from a survey of U.S. teens ages 13 to 17 ( Chapter 3 ) and a survey of U.S. adults ( Chapter 4 ). For details about these surveys, refer to the Methodology section of this report. Among the key findings:

  • 38% of teens say they feel comfortable when topics related to racism or racial inequality come up in class (among those who say these topics have come up). A smaller share (29%) say they feel comfortable when topics related to sexual orientation or gender identity come up.
  • Among the American public , more say parents should be able to opt their children out of learning about LGBTQ issues than say the same about topics related to race (54% vs. 34%).

What do teachers think students should learn about slavery and gender identity?

A diverging bar chart showing that most teachers think students should learn that the legacy of slavery still affects Black Americans today.

We asked public K-12 teachers what they think students should learn in school about two topics in particular:

  • Whether the legacy of slavery still affects the position of Black people in American society today.
  • Whether a person’s gender can be different from or is determined by their sex at birth.

For these questions, elementary, middle and high school teachers were asked about elementary, middle and high school students, respectively.

The legacy of slavery

Most teachers (64%) say students should learn that the legacy of slavery still affects the position of Black people in American society today.

About a quarter (23%) say students should learn that slavery is part of American history but no longer affects the position of Black people in American society. Just 8% say students shouldn’t learn about this topic in school at all.

Majorities of elementary, middle and high school teachers say students should learn that the legacy of slavery still has an impact on the lives of Black Americans.

Gender identity

A diverging bar chart showing that most elementary school teachers say students shouldn’t learn about gender identity at school.

When it comes to teaching about gender identity – specifically whether a person’s gender can be different from or is determined by their sex assigned at birth – half of public K-12 teachers say students shouldn’t learn about this in school.

A third of teachers think students should learn that someone can be a boy or a girl even if that is different from the sex they were assigned at birth.

A smaller share (14%) say students should learn that whether someone is a boy or a girl is determined by their sex at birth.

Views differ among elementary, middle and high school teachers. But teachers across the three levels are more likely to say students should learn that a person’s gender can be different from their sex at birth than to say students should learn gender is determined by sex at birth.

Most elementary school teachers (62%) say students shouldn’t learn about gender identity in school. This is much larger than the shares of middle and high school teachers who say the same (45% and 35%).

What parents and teens say

Parents of K-12 students are more divided on what their children should learn in school about these topics.

In the 2022 survey , 49% of parents said they’d rather their children learn that the legacy of slavery still affects the position of Black people in American society today, while 42% said they’d rather their children learn that slavery no longer affects Black Americans.

When it comes to gender identity, 31% of parents said they’d rather their children learn that gender can be different from sex at birth. An identical share said they would rather their children learn gender is determined by sex at birth. Another 37% of parents said their children shouldn’t learn about gender identity in school.

Teens, like parents, are more divided than teachers on these questions. About half of teens (48%) say they’d rather learn that the legacy of slavery still affects the position of Black Americans today. Four-in-ten would prefer to learn that slavery no longer affects Black Americans.

And teens are about evenly divided when it comes to what they prefer to learn about gender identity. A quarter say they’d rather learn that a person’s gender can be different from their sex at birth; 26% would prefer to learn that gender is determined by sex at birth. About half (48%) say they shouldn’t learn about gender identity in school.

For more on teens’ views about what they prefer to learn in school about each of these topics, read Chapter 3 of this report.

Should parents be able to opt their children out of learning about certain topics?

Most public K-12 teachers (60%) say parents should not be able to opt their children out of learning about racism or racial inequality in school, even if the way these topics are taught conflicts with the parents’ beliefs. A quarter say parents should be able to opt their children out of learning about these topics.

In contrast, more say parents should be able to opt their children out of learning about sexual orientation or gender identity (48%) than say parents should not be able to do this (33%).

On topics related to both race and LGBTQ issues, elementary and middle school teachers are more likely than high school teachers to say parents should be able to opt their children out.

How teachers’ views compare with the public’s views

A diverging bar chart showing that 54% of Americans say parents should be able to opt their children out of learning about LGBTQ issues.

Like teachers, Americans overall are more likely to say parents should be able to opt their children out of learning about sexual orientation or gender identity (54%) than to say they should be able to opt their children out of learning about racism or racial inequality (34%).

Across both issues, Americans overall are somewhat more likely than teachers to say parents should be able to opt their children out.

For more on the public’s views, read Chapter 4 of this report.

How often do topics related to race and LGBTQ issues come up in the classroom?

A horizontal stacked bar chart showing that topics related to racism and racial inequality come up in the classroom more often than LGBTQ issues.

Most teachers who’ve been teaching for more than a year (68%) say the topics of sexual orientation and gender identity rarely or never came up in their classroom in the 2022-23 school year. About one-in-five (21%) say these topics came up sometimes, and 8% say they came up often or extremely often.

Topics related to racism or racial inequality come up more frequently. A majority of teachers (56%) say these topics came up at least sometimes in their classroom, with 21% saying they came up often or extremely often.

These topics are more likely to come up in secondary school than in elementary school classrooms.

How do teachers’ views differ by party?

As is the case among parents of K-12 students and the general public, teachers’ views on how topics related to race and LGBTQ issues should play out in the classroom differ by political affiliation.

  • What students should learn about slavery: 85% of Democratic and Democratic-leaning teachers say students should learn that the legacy of slavery still affects the position of Black people in American society today. This compares with 35% of Republican and Republican-leaning teachers who say the same.

A diverging bar chart showing that teachers’ views on parents opting their children out of learning about race, LGBTQ issues differ widely by party.

  • What students should learn about gender identity: Democratic teachers are far more likely than Republican teachers to say students should learn that a person’s gender can be different from the sex they were assigned at birth (53% vs. 5%). Most Republican teachers (69%) say students shouldn’t learn about gender identity in school.
  • Parents opting their children out of learning about these topics: 80% of Republican teachers say parents should be able to opt their children out of learning about LGBTQ issues, compared with 30% of Democratic teachers. And while 47% of Republican teachers say parents should be able to opt their children out of learning about racism and racial inequality, just 11% of Democratic teachers say this.

A majority of public K-12 teachers (58%) identify with or lean toward the Democratic Party. About a third (35%) identify with or lean toward the GOP. Americans overall are more evenly divided: 47% are Democrats or Democratic leaners, and 45% are Republicans or Republican leaners .

  • For details, refer to the Methodology section of the report. ↩

Social Trends Monthly Newsletter

Sign up to to receive a monthly digest of the Center's latest research on the attitudes and behaviors of Americans in key realms of daily life

Report Materials

Table of contents, ‘back to school’ means anytime from late july to after labor day, depending on where in the u.s. you live, among many u.s. children, reading for fun has become less common, federal data shows, most european students learn english in school, for u.s. teens today, summer means more schooling and less leisure time than in the past, about one-in-six u.s. teachers work second jobs – and not just in the summer, most popular.

About Pew Research Center Pew Research Center is a nonpartisan fact tank that informs the public about the issues, attitudes and trends shaping the world. It conducts public opinion polling, demographic research, media content analysis and other empirical social science research. Pew Research Center does not take policy positions. It is a subsidiary of The Pew Charitable Trusts .

The Oklahoman

Did your elderly parents show signs of dementia when you visited over the holidays?

F inally, you got a chance to return home and spend some time with your family during the recent holidays. You have been living a few hours away from your family for the past decade, so coming home for the holidays is remarkably exciting. Holidays like this are usually a special time. The wonderful traditions, beautiful decorations and delicious food and treats were high on your list of the holiday experience. Mom and Dad always make it so wonderful for you and your family, but this year seemed slightly unusual, something’s different.

More: Robin Gunn: Money's available for all combat veterans. Here are tips for accessing benefits

You can’t quite put your finger on it, but there were some noticeable changes in comparison to last year’s visit home. The house seemed to be somewhat in disarray, with certain items out of place or more untidy than usual. Perhaps you noticed one of the cars had several new dents and dings on it, which was surprising.

This scenario is much more familiar to me than you would like to think. For the past 32 years, I have been involved in helping seniors and their families acquire resources required for a wide array of needs. As such, I’ve become known as an expert or a “go-to” resource. I receive so many calls or emails from children of aging parents with stories similar to what I shared above.

Something seemed different about their mom or dad, maybe both. Their parents are getting older, and on their visits home, they now often notice several differences in their parents’ day-to-day routines. These adult children, often known as “The Sandwich Generation” are busy taking care of their own families, but now it would seem their parents may also need their assistance.

The most challenging aspect is that they are certain that more is going on than what they’re seeing or being told by their parents, and sadly seniors will often only share about 10% of their struggles, choosing to withhold specifics. Often, seniors are hesitant to share their struggles because of fear of losing their independence and control over their own lives. The children often do not know how to approach the subject or how to intervene in some way to be of help to their parents.

But children need to remain engaged and involved in the lives of their aging parents. Do not wait for a catastrophic incident regarding your parents’ health. A respectful conversation should be initiated. Speak to your parents how you would want to be spoken to. It is crucial you respect your parents' life experience and who they are, and recognize that you can still learn from them. Pope Francis said, “Caring for our parents is the highest expression of our humanity.” It takes tapping into our humanity to be understanding and compassionate about the changes occurring in an aging parent’s life.

It's wise to “pre-plan” the care of your parents. Begin researching and becoming informed now and start slowly walking down those roads. Start by once a month looking into the various resources available that provide advice, tips and necessary information for the care of seniors. I discourage being extremely direct with your parents. Instead, talk around the issue, and/or bring up a neighbor or distant family member who may be having similar issues as your parents. Often, your parents will give up information that normally they wouldn’t share with you if you come on too strong and direct regarding the topic of their health and care.

You cannot have a hands-off approach, or a “we’ll cross that bridge when we get there” mentality. Socialization is key. Be proactive and encourage your parents to become socially engaged and involved in various activities and outlets. The mind is a muscle, and just like the body, it must be exercised and engaged to help keep it strong and active. The second half of life can be so wonderful with the time to explore dreams and hobbies, and all seniors should have the opportunity to fully embrace this moment of life. Not only should you encourage your parents to get out and be active, but it’s important to support them, or even go with them to their activities when possible.

Locally, there are several opportunities for seniors to engage in social activities. I have mentioned TRIAD of OKC in a previous column, mainly because it is a program in which seniors can be involved. “TRIAD is an agreement between local law enforcement and seniors to work together to reduce the criminal victimization of the elderly. Triad has monthly meetings for law enforcement and the community to share needs and concerns and work together to develop solutions and identify problem areas for seniors, and develop and implement community-wide solutions.”

More: Several resources are available to help the 50+ generation explore entrepreneurship.

Additionally, there is the Oklahoma Senior Games (okseniorgames.com/ ), which are year-round. They offer highly active challenges like swimming, Dragon Boat racing and tennis to more relaxed games like pickleball, shuffleboard and cornhole. Also, there is Villages OK : A plan and not a place that offers special events and educational workshops to seniors, and you can become a member or a volunteer of this community. These are just a few of the outstanding programs that are ongoing locally that seniors can participate in, develop relationships, and connect with others all while keeping their minds engaged and providing an active social life.

If this is your situation, I encourage you to reach out, ask questions but, most importantly, get involved now in what’s going on with your parents. Do not be caught off guard. Strive to be “in the know” and already on the path to being prepared for what is ahead. As it is commonly known, knowledge is power and can be transformational.

Robin Gunn is the owner of The Oklahoma Senior Journal. She can be reached at [email protected] 

This article originally appeared on Oklahoman: Did your elderly parents show signs of dementia when you visited over the holidays?

Robin Gunn

  • The functions of language
  • Practice Writing English
  • Reading skills Training
  • Privacy Policy
  • Skip to primary navigation
  • Skip to secondary navigation
  • Skip to main content
  • Skip to primary sidebar

Question and Answer English online

Free tests for learners English to do online

They often ……. their parents in the holidays

01/29/2022 //  by  admin //   Leave a Comment

They often ................. their parents in the holidays

They often ……. their parents in the holidays.

  • C. visiting
  • D. are visiting

Reference explanation:

Correct answer: A

often: sign of present simple

Structure: S + V (s/es)

=> Choose answer A

They often visit their parents during the holidays.

Think and answer questions before QAZDO provides answers and solutions

===============

Reader Interactions

Leave a reply cancel reply.

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

Blog The Education Hub

https://educationhub.blog.gov.uk/2024/02/29/fines-for-parents-for-taking-children-out-of-school-what-you-need-to-know/

Fines for parents for taking children out of school: What you need to know

they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

Every moment in school counts and days missed add up quickly. Evidence shows that pupils who have good attendance enjoy better wellbeing and school performance than those who don't.

There are only a few circumstances where a child is allowed to miss school , such as illness or where the school has given permission because of an exceptional circumstance.

However, if your child misses school without a good reason, local councils and schools can intervene and you may be issued a fine.

We’re also introducing a new national framework which will mean all councils have the same rules in place for when they need to consider a fine. We explain more on this below.

It’s important to acknowledge that children with long-term medical or more serious mental health conditions, and those with special educational needs and disabilities may face additional barriers.

For children who face complex barriers to attendance, schools should have sensitive conversations with children and families and work with them to put support in place for their individual needs.

How much could I be fined if my child misses school?   

In the majority of cases, schools and local authorities will try and provide support to help you improve your child’s attendance first, but if this isn’t effective or the absence is for unauthorised term time holiday, parents may face paying a fine.

Currently, it’s the responsibility of the local authority to decide whether or not to issue fines to parents, meaning the process varies from council to council.

However, under the new national framework, all schools will be required to consider a fine when a child has missed 10 or more sessions (5 days) for unauthorised reasons.

From August 2024, the fine for school absences across the country will be £80 if paid within 21 days , or £160 if paid within 28 days .

This rate is in line with inflation and is the first increase since 2012.

Fines per parent will be capped to two fines within any three-year period. Once this limit has been reached, other action like a parenting order or prosecution will be considered.

If you’re prosecuted and attend court because your child hasn’t been attending school, you could get a fine of up to £2,500.

Money raised via fines is only used by the local authority to cover the costs of administering the system, and to fund attendance support. Any extra money is returned to the government.

How can you be sure parent fines are fair?

Fines are a last resort, and parents will be offered support to help improve their child’s attendance first. The vast majority of fines for unauthorised absence (89%) are issued for term time holidays.

If your child is facing barriers to school attendance due to special education needs or disabilities (SEND), schools, local authorities and wider services are required to work together to provide the right support in the first place.

What if my child needs to miss school? 

Your child must attend every day that the school is open, unless:

  • Your child is too ill to attend that day.
  • You have asked in advance and been given permission by the school for your child to be absent on that day due to exceptional circumstances.
  • Your child cannot attend school on that day because it is a day you are taking part in religious observance.
  • Your local authority is responsible for arranging your child’s transport to school and it is not available on that day or has not been provided yet.
  • You are a gypsy/traveller family with no fixed abode, and you are required to travel for work that day meaning your child cannot attend their usual school.

What happens if my child misses school without a good reason? 

If your child is absent and you haven’t received advance permission from the headteacher to take your child out of school, the school and local council may take action.

Before that, your child’s school and your local council are expected to support you to improve the child’s attendance before any measures are put in place .

These measures can include:

  • Issue a fixed penalty notice, otherwise known as a ‘fine’  – your local council can give each parent a fine. If you do not pay the fine after 28 days you may be prosecuted for your child’s absence from school. Check your local council’s rules on when you can be fined.
  • Seek an Education Supervision Order from the family court  – if the council thinks you need support getting your child to go to school but you’re not co-operating, they can apply to a court for an Education Supervision Order. A supervisor will be appointed to help you get your child into education. The local council can do this instead of, or as well as, prosecuting you.
  • Prosecute you  – this means you have to go to court. You could get a fine, a community order or a jail sentence up to 3 months. The court could also give you a Parenting Order.

Why is attendance important? 

For most pupils, the best place to be during term-time in is school, surrounded by the support of their friends and teachers.

This is important not just for your child’s learning, but also for their overall wellbeing, wider development and their mental health.

We’re working with schools and local councils to improve attendance, including by introducing a new data visualisation tool to make it easier to analyse attendance, spot issues and intervene more quickly. Read more about what we’re doing to help schools improve attendance here .

You may also be interested in:

  • What are 'ghost children' and why is attendance so important?
  • Why is school attendance so important and what are the risks of missing a day?
  • School attendance and absence

Tags: Fines for missing school , Fines for taking children out of school , missing school , parents fines for children missing school , School absence fines , school attendance , School fines for holidays , School fines UK , School holiday fines

Sharing and comments

Share this page, related content and links, about the education hub.

The Education Hub is a site for parents, pupils, education professionals and the media that captures all you need to know about the education system. You’ll find accessible, straightforward information on popular topics, Q&As, interviews, case studies, and more.

Please note that for media enquiries, journalists should call our central Newsdesk on 020 7783 8300. This media-only line operates from Monday to Friday, 8am to 7pm. Outside of these hours the number will divert to the duty media officer.

Members of the public should call our general enquiries line on 0370 000 2288.

Sign up and manage updates

Follow us on social media, search by date, comments and moderation policy.

IMAGES

  1. Visiting parents for the holidays?

    they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

  2. 3 Things to Do While Visiting Aging Parents for the Holidays

    they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

  3. Checking on Your Senior Parents During the Holidays

    they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

  4. Family Celebrating Christmas Stock Photo

    they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

  5. How often do you visit your parents each month?

    they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

  6. Managing The Holidays When Your Parents Move In

    they often (visit) their parents in the holidays

COMMENTS

  1. 1. they often (visit)......... their parents in the holiday 2. we

    They often (visit) visit their parents in the holiday. `2`. We (speak) are speak french at the moment. `3.` I (watch) watch T.V about hours a day. `4.` My family usually (go) goes to the movies on sunday.` `5.` Look at the girl ! She ( ride) is rides a horse. `6.` We (play) are playing tennis now. `7.` Minh sometimes (practise) practise the ...

  2. Complete the sentences with the Present simple or the Present ...

    1. they often [visit ]visited their parents in the holidays. 2.we [speak]are speakingFrench at the moment . 3. I [watch ] watch TV about 3 hours a day . 4. my family usually [go]go to the movies on Sunday. 5.look at the girl ! She [ride]is ridinga horse. 6.we [play]are playing tennis now 7.Minh sometimes [practise] practisethe guitar in his room . 8.....

  3. They often (visit) ____________ their parents in the holidays

    In the summer holidays, Mr. Hung, Mrs. Lan and their children often go to Vung Tau for two or three days. They usually stay in a small house or a flat by the sea, but sometimes they stay in a hotel. Last summer they went to Nha Trang.

  4. Home for the holidays: Tips for evaluating your parents' well-being

    Over Thanksgiving, Eliza Kendall visited her parents at her childhood home in Darien, Connecticut. They had both lost weight since she last saw them, her mother most noticeably. And when Kendall looked inside their oven, she found an uneaten pizza. "Reality hits you right in the face when you go home," says Kendall, 54, of Harwich ...

  5. The 7 Most Common Issues Families Have Around The Holidays

    Issue No. 1: Relatives who rehash old arguments or bring up past mistakes. Let bygones be bygones should be your motto this time of year. Unfortunately, there's something about families coming together around the holidays that seems to make people eager to bring up old hurts, arguments and mistakes, said Anna Poss, a therapist in Chicago ...

  6. tips for visiting aging parents during the holidays

    4. If you visit home, be on the lookout for signs that help may be needed. People who visit home after an absence of several months sometimes can see the signs of decline in the condition of the home or the elder. It is important to be on the lookout for these, especially if family is not regularly present.

  7. During Holiday Visits, Five Warning Signs Your Aging Parents ...

    Holiday gatherings with aging family members can reveal a need for them to get help. Notice these warning signs of elders losing independence. Family can take steps toward greater safety.

  8. GoodTherapy

    Other than outlining boundaries and doing everything you can to adhere toand enforce them, here are some additional tactics to keep in mind that can help you have productive and enjoyable family ...

  9. Tips for the Challenges of Parenting During the Holidays

    Don't be harsh or dismissive. Make sure you develop a pattern where your child is speaking, and you are listening. Do ask questions to get a sense of all of his concerns. Don't judge or criticize ...

  10. 3 Tips for Holiday Parenting

    The fact that we had to throw them out didn't matter in the end. Tips for Parenting During the Holiday Craziness. 1. Adjust expectations: Take a minute to dream about your "perfect" holiday ...

  11. Visiting Family for the Holidays

    2. Print out photos of the folks you'll be seeing and make a little book for your child. Their faces will be somewhat familiar even though the situation isn't, which makes them feel safer, so they're less reactive. And don't forget to read books about airplanes! 3. Always explain to kids in advance.

  12. 9 tips for dealing with toxic family during the holidays

    Here are nine expert tips on how to deal with toxic family members during the holiday season … because it's not the most wonderful time of year for everybody. 1. Minimize idle time. If cocktail hour is often the time your father-in-law gets in his first dig, try to put his attention elsewhere. "Suggest something new," says Dreher.

  13. Helping Children and Parents Enjoy the Holidays

    It helps to make note of any external, situational factors that might be having a negative impact on your children's behavior. These might include: any disrupted sleep and eating patterns as a result of traveling or visiting friends and family, over-scheduled calendars, and. any extra holiday shopping trips added to your daily routine.

  14. How to Deal with Parental Narcissism During the Holidays

    10 Tips for Maintaining Your Authentic Self with a Narcissistic Parent. Think ahead about what boundaries you may have to set and keep. Don't be too vulnerable in sharing your life and current ...

  15. adult child

    Yourr parents aren't mind-readers either; you'll need to discuss your boundaries - the why's and the wherefor's - openly and more than once with them. People who don't understand boundaries often feel that they are being treated unfairly and will push back pretty hard, using their usual weaponry. They will feel that you're hurting them.

  16. A Pandemic Guide to Communicating About the Holidays

    A Pandemic Guide to Communicating About the Holidays With Family. The holiday season is often a time for comfort and merriment, though it can also set the stage for strained family interactions. This is especially true amid an ongoing pandemic where many areas of the world have varying access to COVID-19 vaccinations and testing kits.

  17. Things to Look for When You Visit Your Senior Parents This Holiday

    Non-slip flooring, entry ramps, stair rails, and non-skid mats can help decrease the chance of falling. Ensure there is plenty of lighting to help your parents see at night and help increase accessibility in pantries and closets. Grab bars should be strategically placed in the bathroom.

  18. How often should you visit your parents?

    For a few families, visiting weekly is common, however, in some cases, depending on location, visiting frequency could be a lot less, from monthly to once or twice a year. A user wrote on the ...

  19. Family Holiday Traditions, Parenting After 50

    But parents need to adapt to the changing family dynamic, says clinical psychotherapist Deanna Brann, author of Reluctantly Related. "Parents can't assume that the traditions they've always had are going to continue." Parents may maintain that assumption because their holiday routines have continued for so long, often into their children's 20s.

  20. They often (visit)...their parents in the holidays

    1. They often their parents in the holidays. (visit) 2. I really cooking. (like) 3. He can't speak on the phone because he a shower. (have) 4. Look at that man. He a horse. (ride) 5. We sometimes to the cinema on Sunday. (go) 6. I about three DVDs a week. (watch) 7. We tennis now. (play) 8. Right now we French. (speak) 9. I sometimes the guitar ...

  21. Parenting Tips for the Holidays

    Open an Advent card. Attend a faith-based gathering. Let kids' choose holiday music and parents can dance with them. Start a tradition of holiday meditation. Bring out the ornaments, if you have a ...

  22. Supply the correct form of the verb: They often (visit)________their

    days will influence the whole year. As a result, they make every effort to avoid arguments and smile as much as possible. Vietnamese people believe that the first person through the door on New Year's Day can bring either good or bad luck. Children receive lucky money as they do in other countries. 1. Tet occurs in late January or early ...

  23. How does leap day work? Your every-four-years refresher : NPR

    Literally speaking, he says, it's an "awkward calendar hack" aimed at making up for the fact that a year isn't a flat number of days, but more like 365 and a quarter.

  24. Race and LGBTQ Issues in K-12 Schools

    Amid national debates about what schools are teaching, we asked public K-12 teachers, teens and the American public how they see topics related to race, sexual orientation and gender identity playing out in the classroom.. A sizeable share of teachers (41%) say these debates have had a negative impact on their ability to do their job. Just 4% say these debates have had a positive impact, while ...

  25. Did your elderly parents show signs of dementia when you visited ...

    Something seemed different about their mom or dad, maybe both. Their parents are getting older, and on their visits home, they now often notice several differences in their parents' day-to-day ...

  26. They often ……. their parents in the holidays

    often: sign of present simple. Structure: S + V (s/es) => Choose answer A. They often visit their parents during the holidays.

  27. Fines for parents for taking children out of school: What you need to

    Fines are a last resort, and parents will be offered support to help improve their child's attendance first. The vast majority of fines for unauthorised absence (89%) are issued for term time holidays.